Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout9/6/13 project manual aldis Project Manual Project Number:2586-358June 12, 2013 Store Number:67R ALDI RETAIL FACILITY 760 Ruppert Road Iowa City, Iowa 52246 Weaver Boos Consultants 4085 Meghan Beeler Court South Bend, IN 46628 TEL: 574-271-3447 FAX: 574-271-3343 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS PROJECT SUMMARY VOLUME 1 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS VOLUME 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME 3 APPENDIX ‘A’ – ITEMS FURNISHED BY OWNER AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR APPENDIX ‘B’ – ITEMS PROVIDED BY OWNER The preceding appendices are located within the Vendor Information folder on APDProjects. The Vendor Information folder can be found on the left side of this project’s website on www.apdprojects.com. APPENDIX ‘C’ – Geotechnical Exploration Report Phase I SWPPP Excel Bid Form Spreadsheet Appendix ‘C’ is located within the Reports folder on APDProjects. The Reports folder can be found on the left side of this project’s website. TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa PROJECT SUMMARY PROJECT TITLE Project Name: ALDI Food Store Store No.: 67R Building Address: 760 Ruppert Road Iowa City Iowa, 52246 PROJECT DESCRIPTION The Work consists of: New construction of a one-story structural-steel frame building on CMU or poured in place foundations over concrete footings. Masonry veneer with metal stud backup, aluminum storefront windows, and membrane roof. New plumbing, HVAC, and electrical systems. A loading area, sidewalks and other site improvements. Installation of Owner furnished items and materials. Coordination of Owner provided items and materials. PROJECT ADMINISTRATION AND DESIGN Owner’s representative: Mike Rosch Director of Real Estate, ALDI Foods Dwight Division Architect: Weaver Boos Consultants 4085 Meghan Beeler Court South Bend, IN 46628 PH- 574.271.3447 CONTRACT TYPE Single Prime Contract CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents are comprised of the following: Volume 1: Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract. Volume 2: The Technical Specifications Volume 3: Appendices Appendix ‘A’ – Items furnished by Owner and installed by contractor Appendix ‘B’ – Items provided by Owner The preceding appendices are located within the Vendor Information folder on APDProjects. The Vendor Information folder can be found on the left side of this project’s website on www.apdprojects.com. The Drawings. TABLE OF CONTENTS PS-1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SPECIFICATIONS GROUP General Requirements Subgroup DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014200 REFERENCES 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 017300 EXECUTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Facility Construction Subgroup DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033001 CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE TO BE DIAMOND POLISHED 033170 INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE JOINT SEALANTS 035400 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 042000 **V4.0 PROTOTYPE** UNIT MASONRY (BRICK and CMU VENEER) ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa DIVISION 05 - METALS 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 053100 STEEL DECKING 054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 057000 DECORATIVE METAL DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061600 SHEATHING 066400 PLASTIC PANELING DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 074213 METAL SOFFIT PANELS 074243 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 079200 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 083613 SECTIONAL DOORS 084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 088000 GLAZING ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 093000 TILING 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 099100 PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101400 SIGNAGE 102400 ROOF SCREENS 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102813 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 124840 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES Facility Services Subgroup DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION 210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 211000 WATER-BASED FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 IDENTIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220700 PLUMBING INSULATION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221511 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 223300 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224700 DRINKING FOUNTAINS DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230593 TESTING, ADUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230700 HVAC INSULATION 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 233113 DUCTWORK 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 235533 FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 237413 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237414 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, DEHUMIDIFICATION UNIT (RTU-1) DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 262416 PANELBOARDS 262713 ELECTRICITY METERING 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262813 FUSES 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Owner under separate contracts. 4. Owner-furnished products. 5. Specification and drawing conventions. B. Related Section: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: ALDI Food Store No. 67R 1. Project Location: 760 Ruppert Road, Iowa City, Iowa, 52246 B. Owner: Owner: ALDI – Dwight Division – ONE ALDI Drive, Dwight, IL 60420 1. Owner's Representative: Mike Rosch – Director of Real Estate, ALDI Foods – Dwight Division. C. Architect: Weaver Boos Consultants 4085 Meghan Beeler Court South Bend, Indiana 46628 PH: (574) 271. 3447 FAX: (574) 271. 3343 D. Structural Engineer: Paul Fujawa Engineers 17455 Douglas Road South Bend, Indiana 46635-1732 PH: (574) 273. 5014 SUMMARY 011000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa E. Mechanical Engineer: M/E Design Services 120 South Hill Street South Bend, Indiana 4546 PH: (574) 256. 1914 F. Electrical Engineer: M/E Design Services 120 South Hill Street South Bend, Indiana 4546 PH: (574) 256. 1914 Other Owner Consultants: The Owner has retained the following design pro- fessionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: G. Civil Engineer: Weaver Boos Consultants 44085 Meghan Beeler Court South Bend, Indiana 046628 PH: (574) 271. 3447 FAX: (574) 271. 3343. H. Retain first paragraph below only if Contractor is selected by negotiation and subcontracts are subsequently bid. 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. The Work consists of the new construction of a one-story structural-steel frame on CMU or poured in place foundations over concrete footings; masonry veneer with metal stud backup, aluminum storefront windows, and membrane roof; new plumbing, HVAC, and electrical work, including a loading area, sidewalks and other site improvements. B. Type of Contract 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 WORK BY OWNER UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS (APPENDIX B) A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner and other contractors so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner under separate contracts. The Appendix B folder is located within the Vendor information folder on APDProjects. The Vendor Information folder can be found on the left side of this project’s website on www.apdprojects.com. B. Concurrent Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 1. Roofing Work: a. Materials and Installation to be provided by roofer (bid directly to ALDI.): SUMMARY 011000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1) Roof system (membrane) 2) Rigid insulation on roof deck 3) Tapered insulation on roof deck 4) Penetration flashings 5) Wall/ parapet flashings 6) Roof edge metal (gravel stop) 7) Termination of roof systems 8) All roof flashings required for a complete weather-tight roof system 9) Roof hatch and guard rails 10) Walk pads 11) Roof warranty b. [Materials and installation that could be included in the roofer scope or G.C. contract]: (verify with ALDI Real Estate Director) 1) Architectural sheet metal (fascia, soffits, scuppers, gutters, downspouts, friezeboards, etc…) 2) Metal wall panel systems (not including storefront, signage or specialty products) 3) Other roof systems (shingles, standing seam, etc…) and related flashings where necessary 4) Vapor barrier on roof Deck c. Materials and installations provided by G.C.: (omitted from roofer bid) 1) Wood blocking 2) Roof curbs 3) Structural steel / reinforcing 4) Framing 5) Roof deck 6) Penetrations through roof deck 7) HVAC work 8) Storefront system 9) Glazing 10) Masonry 11) Roof Drains 2. Automatic Entrances SUMMARY 011000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3. Quarry Tile 4. Signage and Graphics 5. Foodservice Equipment 6. Fire Alarm – Contractor to provide conduit and boxes; verify requirements with Owner. 7. Security System – Contractor to provide conduit and boxes; verify requirements with Owner. 1.6 OWNER-FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PRODUCTS (APPENDIX A) A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections. The Appendix A folder is located within the Vendor information folder on APDProjects. The Vendor Information folder can be found on the left side of this project’s website on www.apdprojects.com. B. Contractor to install owner furnished products. C. Owner-Furnished Products: 1. Section 064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork: a. Counter Tops b. Window Sills c. Plastic-laminate-clad Panels 2. Section 083800 Traffic Doors a. Impact Doors **Ordered by G.C., Direct Billed to ALDI Divisional Representative** 3. Section 10/11 0600 Miscellaneous Specialties and Equipment a. Tackboards b. Price Card Moldings c. Security Railings **Ordered by G.C., Direct Billed to ALDI Divisional Representative** d. Battery Chargers e. Safe and Safe Base f. Spot Merchandisers g. Cooler/Freezer Racking System 4. Section 102600 Wall and Door Protection a. Wall Guards b. Floor Mounted Bumper Rail **Ordered by G.C., Direct Billed to ALDI Divisional Representative** c. Graphic Screen Wall Bumper Rail **Ordered by G.C., Direct Billed to ALDI Divisional Representative** d. Door Guards SUMMARY 011000 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa e. Aluminum Corner Guards 5. Section 113100 Residential Appliances a. Refrigerator/Freezer 6. Section 118226 Waste Compactors and Destructors a. Bailing Press 7. Section 123200 Manufactured Casework a. Plastic-laminate-faced Cabinets b. Plastic-laminate-faced Lockers c. Check-out Lanes w/ lane closure straps d. Sacking Counter Unit 1.7 NATIONAL ACCOUNT VENDORS 1. Manufactured Casework a. Contractors doing work for Batavia, Denton, Dwight, Faribault, Greenwood, Hinckley, Oak Creek, O'Fallon, Olathe, Springfield, Valparaiso and Webberville divisions shall determine quantity of KPI Concepts, Inc., material and coordinate with Owner’s Representative to order through Burlington, Iowa. Phone: (319) 754-5922. b. Contractors doing work for Center Valley, Frederick, Jefferson, Mt. Juliet, Orlando, Salisbury, Saxonburg, South Windsor and Tully divisions shall determine quantity of material and coordinate Riddley Cabinet Co., Kings Mountain, NC. Phone: with Owner’s Representative to order through (704) 435-8829. 2. Stainless steel products: order from ‘The Tarpening – LaFollette Company, Inc.’; For pricing and ordering, contact either Chad Martin (cmartin@tarp-laff.com) or Kim Martin (kmartin@tarp-laff.com) Tel: 317-780- 1500. 3. National Account for HVAC Equipment - Refer to Mechanical Drawings Sahara Express™ a. Consolidated Energy Solutions Inc. CES Dual-Path Dehumidification RTU Contact: Rick Wilson (P) 888-598-1198 rickwilson@cesinc.ca b. Lennox Industries - 800-367-6285 4. National Account for Light fixtures - Refer to Electrical Drawings a. Security Lighting – Alexandria Pires – 847-302-3617. 5. National Account for Power Wall - Refer to Electrical Drawings a. Custom Designed Controls, LLC. John Stryker and Ed Rios – 706-356-0325. 6. National Account for Bread Alcove Tile (V2.0 and V3.0 Prototypes) and Restroom - Refer to Architectural Drawings a. Dal-Tile – National pricing is available at any Dal-Tile location. Contractor to request ALDI Tile to receive the ALDI National Account pricing. Dal-Tile Distributor to contact Dal-Tile National Accounts @ national.accounts@daltile.com or 214-309-3391 if any questions or problems arise. SUMMARY 011000 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa b. Confirm the following pricing with Dal-Tile when ordering – see specification section 093000 (Tiling) for more specific information. 1) Bread Area tile, CT-2, 12x12: $2.55 each 2) Restroom Tile, CT-3, 12x12: $1.08 each 3) Restroom Tile Base, CB-1 6x12: $8.50 each 1.8 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 SUMMARY 011000 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Section: 1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, which will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. e. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. f. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. g. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. h. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. i. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. j. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers as required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Conditions: Owner will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Owner will consider requests for substitution if received prior to the Notice of Award, unless otherwise acceptable. All Substitutions must be identified prior to submittal of bid. 1. Conditions: Owner will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Owner will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Owner will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 7 days,after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Owner. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change. 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Owner will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Work Change Directive: Owner may issue a Work Change Directive. Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Work Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Coordination drawings. 4. Requests for Information (RFIs). 5. Project meetings. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information from each other during construction. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, which depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. a. For stores with a Quarry Tile Sales Floor: Allow time for the Owner to have new quarry tile floor finish installed after perimeter walls and before any new interior partitions, wall furring, or other floor mounted items are installed. The contractor shall be responsible to coordinate extensions of any utilities, which penetrate the floor with quarry tile installation; to provide "mud-free" access to the building for the tile layers and their supplies; to see that an adequate water supply is available in the building during the tile installation. Note: Only wheeled equipment having non-marking wheels shall be allowed on quarry tile and Backroom floors. Contractor shall allow for in his schedule that Owner’s quarry tile installer will not be available to install quarry tile between mid-December and second week in January. 2. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings for areas above ceilings where close tolerances are required between building elements and mechanical and electrical work and where installation is not completely shown on Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. 1.5 KEY PERSONNEL A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Coordinate and submit RFIs via APDProjects in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. 2. During Bidding, the contractor will be responsible to post all RFIs to APDProjects. 3. During Construction, the contractor will be responsible to upload all RFIs to APDProjects. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: Utilize the automated RFI tool on APDProjects. D. The Owner will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for response for each RFI. 1. Action on RFIs that does not constitute a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Owner in writing within 5 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require responsive action. 1.3 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Owner's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each resubmittal. C. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A). j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification. D. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. E. Required Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Owner observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Submit the following number of copies: a. Shop drawings, reviewed and annotated by the Contractor - two black-line prints. b. If electronic shop drawings are submitted, one hardcopy is required to be submitted. c. Product data - 1 copies. d. Samples - 2, plus extra samples as required indicating range of color, finish, and texture to be expected. e. Inspection and test reports - 1 copies. f. Warranties - 2 copies. g. Survey data - 4 copies. h. Closeout submittals - 2 copies. F. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than Contractor will be discarded. 1. Transmittal Form: Use facsimile of sample form included in Project Manual. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIRED TEST SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information to the Owner's designated representative in addition to requirements specific to each Section. ARCHITECTURAL/STRUCTURAL TESTS OPER. & MAINT. DATA 1. Subgrade Compaction X (including 7 additional at canopy slab) 2. Concrete Tests: (3 per day min.) A. Concrete Tests X B. One slump test per set of X cylinder tests 3. Concrete Slab At Sales Floor A. Floor Flatness X A. Floor Levelness X 4. Asphalt Base Tests (5 locations) X 5. Overhead Doors X 6. Dock Plate Leveler X PLUMBING TESTS OPER. & MAINT. DATA 1. Water Heaters X HVAC TESTS OPER. & MAINT. DATA 1. Air Handling Units, Curbs,Unit Heater X SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2. Air Balance X ELECTRICAL TESTS OPER. & MAINT. DATA 1. Panels/Switchgear/Disconnects X 2. Bells/Buzzers X 2.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: 1. Action Submittals: Submit paper copies of each submittal as indicated above. 2. Informational Submittals: Submit one paper copie of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." 4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 5. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on , reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed dataunless submittal based upon Architect'sdigital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. I. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. K. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa L. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." M. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 2.3 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Owner. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 OWNER’S ACTION A. General: Owner will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Each submittal will be reviewed and marked to indicate corrections or modifications required. C. Informational Submittals: Owner will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Owner will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with . requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Owner or Architect C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect or Owner for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. 1.4 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. B. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Fabricator/Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing/manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. E. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Owner. 2. Notify Owner seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Owner's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality- control services. END OF SECTION 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. "Directed": A command or instruction by Owner. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." B. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." C. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. D. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. E. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. F. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. G. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ICC International Code Council ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC) C. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board REFERENCES 014200 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point Available from Defense Standardization Program Available from General Services Administration Available from National Institute of Building Sciences FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200 REFERENCES 014200 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to,Owner's construction forces, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. All utility use charges are to be paid by GC until the project is turned over to ALDI. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails. B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. , B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architectand construction personnel office activities and to accommodate project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 1. Contractor shall provide temporary heat maintaining +40 degrees within building shell after wall and roof in- sulation are in place. Contractor shall increase temporary heat to +50 degrees during two weeks that Own- er's quarry tile is being installed by others. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for the project. Permanent electric power service may be used when it becomes available, however monthly charges shall be paid for by the contractor until the building is turned over to the TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa owner. Coordinate with ALDI Construction Representative to determine length of time that building systems, including but not limited to Refrigeration and HVAC, need to be running for proper startup and testing. 1. Install electric power service underground, unless otherwise indicated. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Contractor shall provide temporary lighting maintaining a minimum of 40 FC within building shell. During quarry tile installation, 40 FC at 1’ above floor shall be verified using a light meter. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving." D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply withrequirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent and requirements specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing." C. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations, and as directed by Owner. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material. 4. Discard, replace or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 5. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Section: 1. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Use product specified if Owner does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. B. Product Selection Procedures: PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or , substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be consideredunless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Construction Waste Management and Disposal 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. C. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. D. Final Property Survey: Submit 2 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. EXECUTION 017300 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architectpromptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Owner. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. EXECUTION 017300 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field- engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. D. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyorto prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. F. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. G. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL A. Target end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work where possible. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. EXECUTION 017300 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. 1. Any effluent or excess runoff from masonry cleaning must be treated and released in accordance with all federal state and local requirements. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. C. Only wheeled equipment having non-marking wheels shall be allowed on quarry tile and Backroom floors. 3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. EXECUTION 017300 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 017300 EXECUTION 017300 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request. 1. Schedule Substantial Completion walk-through with Required Design Professionals. General Contractor shall contact the Building Department to determine any additional design professional affidavits required prior to issuance of C of O and provide at least (1) months notice to Professional of Record to schedule visits prior to anticipated turn over date or issuance of Certificate of Occupancy. 2. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 3. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 4. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 5. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 6. Complete startup testing of systems. 7. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 11. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 1.5 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Pressure wash the following areas: 1) All concrete under canopy including shopping cart storage area, concrete bumpers. 2) All sidewalks adjacent to the building, truck dock well, and stairs. 3) Entire parking lot and parking lot curbs. 4) All perimeter sidewalks on site or adjacent. 5) Parking lot drive entrance. 6) Any brick that was soiled during landscaping. 7) Offsite pavement adjacent to site that was soiled by general contractor. e. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. f. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. g. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. h. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. i. Sweep and vacuum all concrete floors. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned- out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. END OF SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Emergency operation and maintenance manuals. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit two sets of marked-up record prints. B. Record Product Data: Submit two paper copies of each submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification,where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 2.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Format: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, 2 copies. B. Emergency Manuals: Types of emergencies, emergency instructions, and emergency procedures. C. Operation Manuals: System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, operating procedures, wiring diagrams, control diagrams and sequence of operation, and piped system diagrams. D. Product Maintenance Manuals: Source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds. E. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, joint fillers, placement procedures, finishes, and curing for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade not to receive diamond polishing. 4. Walks and curbs 5. Miscellaneous Concrete 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs ACI-certified Flatwork Technicians and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and to Owner, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technicians and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technicians - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials" 2. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete" 3. ACI 302.1R, "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction" 4. ACI 302.2R, “Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials” 5. ACI 308.1, “Standard Specification for Curing Concrete” 6. ACI 318, “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed. B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated into flat sheets from as-drawn steel wire. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or Class C b. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag: ASTM 989 Grade 100 or Grade 120. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S crushed coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Crush Coarse-Aggregate Size: Coarse aggregate shall be a large as possible while complying to ACI standards. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Types A, F or G 2.6 VAPOR RETARDER (AT SLAB) A. When required by project building code or site specific conditions: Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, permeance after conditioning less than 0.04 perms (US), membrane not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape. 1. Available Products: a. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 10 mils. b. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra 10. c. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 10 mil. 2. Installation: to be performed in conformance with ASTM E 1643 A. Subslab Fill Material: Material shall be a well graded crush and run material capable of being compacted to 95% of its modified proctor. The subbase fill material shall adequately support all construction equipment such as ready mix trucks, placing buggies and a laser screed. Materials that excessively rut such as natural gravels shall not be permitted. 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class B. 1. Products: a. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Kure-N-Seal 30. 2.8 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 85-95 per ASTM D 2240. 1. Provide at interior control joints operating at 40 or higher: Metzger/McGuire Co., Concord, NH (800)223- 6680; “MM-80 Semi-Rigid Epoxy Joint Filler". Color shall be standard Gray. PROPERTY TEST METHOD PROPERTY VALUE Shore A Hardness.………….ASTM D2240……………..85 or greater Tensile Strength.…………….ASTM D638………………500 psi “ Adhesion to Concrete ……...ASTM D4541……………..285 psi “ Solids Content………………………………………………100% CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa Acceptable for use in USDA regulated facilities C. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, aromatic polyurea with a Type A shore durometer hardness range of 90 to 95 per ASTM D 2240. 1. Provide at interior control joints operating at 45F or lower, including freezers to -20F: Metzger/McGuire Co., Concord, NH (800)223-6680; “Spal-Pro RSF Rapid Set Freezer Polyurea Joint Filler”. Color shall be standard Gray PROPERTY TEST METHOD PROPERTY VALUE Shore A Hardness.………….ASTM D2240……………..85 or greater Tensile Strength.…………….ASTM D638………………500 psi “ Adhesion to Concrete ……...ASTM D4541……………..350 psi “ Solids Content………………………………………………100% Acceptable for use in USDA regulated facilities 2. Control joints in exposed slabs on grade shall be filled with Metzger McGuire’s Spal Pro RS 88. Color shall be standard Gray. D. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. 2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment for slab areas beneath floor coverings: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment for slab areas remaining exposed: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 20%. 2. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag: 25%. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 1.00 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.55. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches plus or minus 1 inch B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches plus or minus 1 inch 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Interior Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. (without water reducer) 3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio = 0.53 4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 5. Items specified to slab to be dyed and polished a. Mix Analysis 1) The owner reserves the right to require alterations to the concrete mix design based on the mix analysis. b. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1) Slab on grade concrete: a) 5” slabs: 1 ½ inch nominal. b) 4” slabs: 1 inch nominal c) All other concrete: conform to ACI 318. D. Walks, stoops, curbs, pavement and other exterior concrete: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.(without water reducer) 3. Maximum water Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio = 0.45 1. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent 2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.13 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces. C. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. E. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. F. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. G. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. H. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. I. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. J. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. K. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. When required by project building code or site specific conditions: plastic vapor retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. B. Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to manufacturer's written instructions. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not weld reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of slabs. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-third of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond- rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Retain paragraph above or first paragraph and subparagraph below. ACI 301 permits water to be added to concrete mixture on-site to adjust slump, up to amount allowed in design mixture. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Water addition at the site shall be in accordance with ASTM C-94. Person(s) responsible for jobsite water additions shall be determined at the pre slab coordination meeting. All additions of water at the site shall be noted on batch ticket and the concrete inspector’s ticket. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete with external vibrators during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position using chairs or spacers during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to where required. 5. Begin initial floating of flatwork using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view. 3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with thin-film-finish coating system. a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; Revise surface plane tolerances to suit Project. See Evaluations for description of F-number system. ACI 301 suggests that all residential floors and nonresidential floors less than 10,000 sq. ft. (929 sq. m) be measured by straightedge method and that other nonresidential floors be measured by F-number system. D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 2. Verify medium broom finish for freezer slab with ALDI Representative. 3.9 EXTERIOR CONCRETE PAVEMENT A. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to concrete walks, platforms, steps, stoops, ramps, and pavement, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel- troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor rods for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure all unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller within 24 hrs of concrete placement according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process within 7 days of store turn-over, but no later than 24 hours prior to store turn-over, and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.12 JOINT FILLING A. Slab on grade joint filling shall be performed per section 033170. B. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least three months and permanent ambient temperature has been reached. 2. Refrigerated areas (coolers, freezers) should be filled after area is stabilized at final operating temperature for a minimum of five (5) days, fourteen (14) days preferred for cooler environments (33F - 45F). 3. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. C. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. 1. Joint Cleanout and preparation should be done utilizing dust-free, diamond blade equipped cleanout saws such as those manufactured by Sawtec/US Surface Preparation, (800)624-7832, Joe Due Equipment, (877)563-3383, or equivalent. D. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 1. Silica sand may be used at contractor’s option to choke-off shrinkage cracks beneath filler. Silica must be dry, bagged, of 20 to 40 grit;a maximum of 1/4” of silica sand can placed at the bottom of the saw-cut joints to prevent filler run-thru into the shrinkage crack. 2. Compressible foam backer rod may be used in through slab construction joints only. The use of backer rod in any saw-cut joints less than 2” deep will result in the rejection of all saw-cut joints work. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when required by Owner. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Owner's satisfaction. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner may engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Verification of use of required design mixture. 3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 5. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive- strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. A. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness in conformance to ASTM E 1155 within 48 hours of removal of curing materials. END OF SECTION 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 033001 - CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE TO BE POLISHED PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section slab on grade concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, finishes, and curing, for slabs to receive diamond polishing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications for floors receiving diamond polish: A qualified installer who employs an ACI-certified Flatwork Technicians and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. The floor slab subcontractor shall provide five (3) projects where the polished slab on grade served as the finished floor. The Owner reserves the right to review and approve slab on grade finishing subcontractors B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cement material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. C. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials" 2. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete" 3. ACI 302.1R, "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction" 4. ACI 302.2R, “Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials” 5. ACI 308.1, “Standard Specification for Curing Concrete” 6. ACI 318, “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. D. Preinstallation Conference Call: Conduct a preslab placement meeting via conference call for interior floor slabs on grade to be polished. 1. Review special inspection, testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction, contraction and isolation joints, joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, floor flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 2. The following representatives of each entity directly concerned with the floor slabs on grade are required to attend: a. ALDI Director of Real Estate. b. General Contractor's superintendent. c. Independent testing agency. d. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. e. Concrete Contractor. f. Slab on grade finishing subcontractor. g. Conveying subcontractor. h. Polishing subcontractor. CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE TO BE POLISHED 033001 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3. The approximately two hour meeting shall be conducted via conference call by CRT Concrete Consulting, LLC PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT – (if required) A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed. B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated into flat sheets from as-drawn steel wire. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES – (if required) A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. B. Load Transfer Dowels: For new Slab construction joints shall contain PNA diamond dowels 24” on center per the drawings. For a new slab cast adjacent to an existing slab, use PNA square dowels 18” on center anchored into the existing slab. The portion of the dowel that will be cast into the newly placed concrete shall receive PNA Square Dowel clips per the drawings. Add mechanical splices and connections for steel reinforcement here if required. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, or Type II gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618 a. Prohibited 3. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace: ASTM C 989. a. Prohibited B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S crushed coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Crushed Coarse-Aggregate Size: a. Slab on grade concrete: 1) 5” slabs: 1 ½ inch nominal, similar to ASTM C 33 #467 with 100% passing the 1 ½” sieve. 2) 4” slabs: 1 inch nominal, similar to ASTM C 33 #57 with 100% passing the 1” sieve. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE TO BE POLISHED 033001 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A, F or G 2.6 VAPOR RETARDER (AT SLAB) A. When required by project building code or site specific conditions, and shown on the drawings: Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, permeance after conditioning less than 0.04 perms (US), membrane not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape. 1. Available Products: a. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 10 mils. b. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra 10. c. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 10 mil. 2. Installation: to be performed in conformance with ASTM E 1643 B. Subslab Fill Material: Material shall be a well graded crush and run material capable of being compacted to 95% of its modified proctor. The subbase fill material shall adequately support all construction equipment such as ready mix trucks, placing buggies and a laser screed. Materials that excessively rut such as natural gravels shall not be permitted. 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler: ASTM D 4819 Type II ½” thick closed cell non crosslinked polyethelene foam. B. Bond breaker: At the construction joint between the back room and the sales floor slab, install a felt paper bond breaker 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURE A. Interior Slabs-on-Grade to be Diamond Polished: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. (without water reducer) 3. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio = 0.53 4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 5. Items specified to slab to be polished a. Mix Analysis 1) The sales floor slab on grade shall be analyzed by CRT Concrete Consulting per chapter six of ACI 302 proposed mixes. a) Mixture shall plot in Zone II 2) The owner reserves the right to require alterations to the concrete mix design based on the mix analysis. b. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1) Slab on grade concrete: CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE TO BE POLISHED 033001 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa a) 5” slabs: 1 ½ inch nominal, similar to ASTM C 33 #467 with 100% passing the 1 ½” sieve. b) 4” slabs: 1 inch nominal, similar to ASTM C 33 #57 with 100% passing the 1” sieve. c) All other concrete: conform to ACI 318. c. Manufactured fine aggregate is prohibited d. Supplementary cementitous materials are prohibited. 2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.10 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. 3.2 VAPOR RETARDERS A. When required by project building code or site specific conditions, and shown on the drawings: plastic vapor retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturers recommended tape. 2. Penetrations such as plumbing shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Bituminous Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT – (if required) A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not weld reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE TO BE POLISHED 033001 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3.4 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. Construction joint between the sales floor and back of the store shall receive PNA diamond dowels per the details. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. 1. Early Entry Sawed Joints: Contraction joints shall be installed with early entry power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete as soon as cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. Location of control joints shall be reviewed by the floor slab subcontractor. Any alterations suggested shall be submitted to the General Contractor for review with CRT Concrete Consulting, LLC. and the engineer of record. Joint saver must be used where one sawcut crosses another. The dust created by the sawing must be collected and removed from the floor’s surface as soon as possible and shall not be permitted to lay on the slab overnight. 2. Joint spacing for a 5” slab shall be approximately 12’-6” on center. Spacing for 4” slab shall be approximately 10’-0” on center D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: 1. Interior column isolation shall be installed per appropriate details. Anchor bolts shall not protrude into the sales floor concrete. 2. The perimeter of the sales floor slab on grade shall be isolated from other rigid surface with isolation materials or a bond breaker. 3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Concrete slab on grade to be polished shall not be placed prior to the completion of the water tight roofing system. C. Water addition at the site shall be in accordance with ASTM C-94. Person(s) responsible for jobsite water additions shall be determined at the pre slab coordination meeting. All additions of water at the site shall be noted on batch ticket and the concrete inspector’s ticket. D. The sales floor concrete shall be placed by ready mix truck, concrete conveyor, or motorized buggy in a single placement. Initial strike off of the sales floor shall be performed with an approved ride on laser screed. Hand held vibrating screeds (with or without laser control) shall not be permitted. E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE TO BE POLISHED 033001 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.6 FINISHING INTERIOR FLOOR SLABS TO RECEIVE DIAMOND POLISHING A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and re-straighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. 1. Apply a machine trowel finish to surfaces to be polished. a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 40; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade. b. Note: Flatness and Levelness Tests must be performed by third party inspector. The testing shall be performed per ASTM E1155 with the exception that the testing shall begin within 24 hours after completion of the finishing process. Preliminary findings must be communicated to the ALDI Construction Representative upon completion of the testing. The official report must be provided to the ALDI Construction Representative within 5 working days of the sales floor placement. c. Troweling of floor receiving diamond polish shall be done using plastic finish blades to ensure the slab in not blackened. Blackening of the slab shall not be permitted. d. Walking on the slab without wearing Finishing Slicks, Shoe Ins or walking on knee boards shall not be permitted. e. The finishing process at the sales floor slab and near interior columns shall be reviewed and approved by Aldi or its agents. f. The application of water during finishing shall be prohibited. g. edges shall receive a machine finish with either ride on trowels or walk behind edge machines. hand finishing of edges is prohibited. 2. Failure to comply with the Ff/Fl shall result in the removal and replacement of the sales floor. 3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306 for cold-weather protection and ACI 305 for hot-weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft./ hr before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Slabs to be diamond polished shall not be cured D. Protection: Slabs to be polished shall not receive permanent protection. Localized protection in the form of temporarily placed tarps, Ram Board can be used. All protection of slabs to be polished shall be removed at the end of each day’s work. E. No eating or drinking on slabs to be polished shall be permitted. F. Storage: Storing materials on slab to be polished shall not be permitted. CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE TO BE POLISHED 033001 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3.8 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS 1. Performed per section 035400. 3.9 JOINT FILLING A. Slab on grade joint filling shall be performed per section 033170. 3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Owner's satisfaction. At the Owner’s sole discretion, repairs and patching of defective areas may be considered. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner may engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. B. Observation shall be provided by CRT Concrete Consulting, LLC for floor slab construction. C. See FF and FL testing requirements in finishing section above. D. Concrete Tests by the Owners Testing Agency: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Unless otherwise required, obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each load delivered for interior slabs on grade and, not less than one test for each day's pour of other concrete mixtures. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample taken. In addition the air content shall be tested on the first delivered load. 4. Density and Yield: ASTM C 138; one test for each composite sample taken. 5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test for each composit sample taken. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive- strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE TO BE POLISHED 033001 - 7 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Owner, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 033001 CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE TO BE POLISHED 033001 - 8 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 033170 –INTERIOR CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Joint sealing and filling for all interior slab on grade concrete including the back room and sales floor joints. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Submit brand name, chemical composition, installation procedures and certificate of compliance with required standards for the following products: a. Elastomeric joint materials (sealant and back up materials) b. Polyurea joint placement 2. Submit product data one month prior to slab on grade placements. B. Installation contractor qualifications 1. Provide letter of certification from the installer of semi rigid poly urea joint filler. 2. Letter shall be from the manufacturer of the semi rigid poly urea joint filler and shall state that the proposed contractor is qualified to install material on this specific project. C. The joint sealant contractor shall submit a project specific Letter of Qualification and/or Certification from the joint sealant manufacturer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Interior sealants in food preparation areas shall meet the compositional requirements for use in USDA regulated facilities, as required by FDA according to 21 CFR 177.2600, and local authorities having jurisdiction. B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Follow the Manufacturer’s written recommendations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Elastomeric sealants for use in isolation joints A. Color for dyed and polished concrete shall be matched to Metzger McGuire’s High Tea. Color for non dyed and polished concrete shall be Standard Gray. B. Approved Polyurethane Sealants. 1. Sikaflex -2C NS, by Sika Corporation 2. Sonolastic NP-1, by BASF (Sonneborn) 3. Eucolastic Series, by Euclid Chemical Corporation 4. Dymeric 240, by Tremco 2.2 Semi-rigid joint filler to be used at all sawn contraction joints and joints that will receive pallet truck traffic. A. Approved Interior Joint Fillers. 1. Newly Placed Concrete a. Polished Concrete 1) Spal Pro RS 65 by Metzger McGuire. Grey color, final color selection to be made by ALDI. 2) Install during the dye and polish process. b. Freezer Slab 1) Spal Pro RSF Rapid Set Freezer Polyurea Joint Filler by Metzger McGuire. Color shall be Standard Gray 2) Coordinate installation with the general contractor CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE JOINT SEALANTS 033170 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa c. All other interior slab on grade work 1) Spall Pro RS 88 or MM80 by Metzger McGuire or 2) SL 85 by Versa Flex or 3) QuickJoint 200 or 300 by Euclid Chemical 4) Color shall be Standard Gray 5) Installation shall be delayed as long as possible to permit slab shrinkage. 2. Existing Concrete a. Polished Concrete 1) Spal Pro RS 88 or MM80 by Metzger Mcguire. Grey color, final color selection to be made by ALDI. b. Freezer Slab 1) Spal Pro RSF Rapid Set Freezer Polyurea Joint Filler by Metzger McGuire. Color shall be Standard Gray c. All other interior slab on grade work 1) Spall Pro RS 88 or MM80 by Metzger McGuire or 2) SL 85 by Versa Flex or 3) QuickJoint 200 or 300 by Euclid Chemical 4) Color shall be Standard Gray 3. All Other Areas a. RS 88, by Metzger McGuire b. SL 85 by Versa Flex c. QuickJoint 200 or 300, by Euclid Chemical Corporation 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS A. Stain Preventing Film 1. SPF, by Metzger McGuire 2. CleanCut, by Euclid Chemical Corporation B. Equipment 1. Dust Free Saw a. Saw Tec Crack Vac by Blasttrac b. Joe Due Saw by Joe Due 2. Polyurea Pumps a. PCH GMP Series by AST b. JointMaster Pro 2 Series by Webac c. SB 2005 by Hi-Tech PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect joints indicated to receive joint sealers, joint fillers, and/or caulking compound for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not allow joint sealer work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cleaning of Floor Joints 1. Immediately prior to application of joint materials re-saw, with a dust free saw, all floor joints to full depth of initial saw cut. No other method shall be employed in cleaning out the floor joints prior to the installation of the filler. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming. Ensure dirt, debris, saw laitance, release agent, curing compound, and other foreign material are removed from full depth of joint. B. Stain Preventing Film 1. Use stain preventing film to protect slab surfaces from contact with semi-rigid polyurea joint filler. Follow manufacturer’s application instructions. Do not use tape to protect slab surfaces from contact with semi- rigid polyurea joint filler. CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE JOINT SEALANTS 033170 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Comply with joint sealer, filler, and caulking manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply 2. Install joint sealer/filler just prior to substantial completion (shelving & racking), unless noted otherwise. 3. Immediately prior to sealing/filing, clean joints to full depth of sealant/filler in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Remove form release agent, curing compound or other contaminants. B. Fill contraction, isolation and construction joints in floor slabs unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein. C. For interior slabs, use semi-rigid joint filler in contraction and construction joints, and use elastomeric sealant in isolation joints, unless noted otherwise. D. Elastomeric Joint Sealant Installation 1. General, unless noted otherwise herein or on the drawings a. Install over soft preformed joint filler material. b. Tool surface to provide smooth, attractive appearance and geometry recommended by the sealant manufacturer. E. Semi-rigid Joint Filler Installation: 1. Install products per manufacture’s recommendations. 2. Discontinue scrubbing of slab surface for 72-HRS prior to intended joint filler and sealant installation. 3. Apply narrow line of joint filler stain preventing film on both sides of joints. 4. Initially fill joints with semi-rigid polyurea epoxy joint filler at the earliest point in time permitted by the manufacturer. Completely fill joints in one or two passes, if needed, to produce a slight crown. 5. Remove excess filler from exposed concrete surface prior to it setting. 6. Add extra filler prior to setting, if needed, to prevent depressed areas. 7. After curing, razor off crown so filler is flush with the adjacent concrete surfaces. 8. Immediately remove stain preventing film after shaving joint filler. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for removal. 9. Repair joints one week prior to store opening with semi-rigid polyurea joint filler as defined below. 10. One month before end of warranty period, repair exposed joints. 3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Install caution tape around work area to protect joint materials during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction traffic and operations. B. If despite protection; damage, splits or deterioration occurs; cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint materials immediately. Refill joints with new materials in required areas that are indistinguishable from original work. C. Clean off excess joint materials or smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by approved methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint material and of products in which joints occur. END OF SECTION 033170 CONCRETE SLAB ON GRADE JOINT SEALANTS 033170 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 035400 – DIAMOND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Approved Densifier 2. Approved Stain Protection C. Related Sections: 1. Division 3 Section “Cast-In-Place” for general applications of concrete. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data sheets and installation instructions for each product specified. B. Qualification Data: For firms indicated in “Quality Assurance” Article, including lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. C The polishing contractor shall submit a project specific Letter of Qualification and/or Certification from the manufacturer of the: Polishing equipment Lithium densifier Stain inhibitor 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer densifier and guard products shall have minimum 3 years experience in the production of densifier and guard products. B. Finish of Sales floor edges not concealed by product shall be completed in such a manner such that that is no discernable difference between the main floor finish and the finish achieved at all exposed edges. C. Installer Qualifications: Minimum three 3 years experience of polished concrete and has successfully completed not less than five 5 projects comparable in scale and complexity. Applicator should be certified by Manufacturer. ALDI and it consultants reserve the right to approve polishing subcontractors. D. Substitutions: The use of any products other than those specified will be considered providing that the Contractor requests its use in writing within 21 days prior to bid date. This request shall be accompanied by: 1. A certificate of compliance, along with product and installation data, from the material manufacturer stating that the proposed products meet or exceed the requirements specified for application of a polished concrete floor. E. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Products shall comply with the United States Clean Air Act for maximum Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content as specified in PART 2 of this section. F. Source Limitations: Obtain each specified material from same source and maintain high degree of consistency in workmanship throughout Project. G. Mock Up: 1. In a portion of the concrete floor selected by ALDI, prepare an area for review and approval. The mock up shall be installed following the removal of any existing flooring. The mock up location shall be selected by Aldi or its agents. DIAMOND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR 035400 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2. Construct the mockup using processes and techniques intended for use on permanent work, including curing procedures. 3. The mockup shall polished and densified by the individual workers who will actually be performing the work for the Project. 4. Obtain written approval of the mockup from ALDI before the start of work. 5. Retain approved mockup through completion of the Work for use as a quality standard for finished work. 6. Approved mockup may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 7. The following information will be determined via the mock up process: a. The initial starting grit required to provide the desired level of aggregate exposure. b. What width crack will require repair. c. What size spalling will require repair. d. Whether the entire polished area will be epoxy grouted. (existing concrete only) e. See Mock Up requirement contained at the end of this section. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with legible manufacturer’s identification and information. B. Store specified products in conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS oo and 90F during application and at A. Environmental Conditions: Maintain an ambient temperature of between 50 least 48 hours after completion. B. Protection: Precautions shall be taken to avoid damage or contamination of any surfaces near the work zone. Protect completed work from moisture or contamination. C. All equipment must be diapered and have non-marking tires. Do not allow pipe cutting or welding to be performed on the slab. Do not use red or blue chalk lines, as they may permanently stain concrete. D. On any concrete floor to be polished, there shall be no eating, drinking, use of tobacco products, or any other activity that could damage the finish of the concrete floor. E. No other trades will be allowed in the areas being worked on due to possible safety and floor contamination issues. F. Work shall not commence until the building is enclosed and in a water tight condition. PRE-JOB CONFERENCE A. At the completion of the mock up process, the required polishing steps and overall polishing scheduling will be coordinated and agreed upon by ALDI and the General Contractor. B. At ALDI’s request a Mock Report shall be issued by CRT Concrete Consulting, LLC. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Prosoco, 3741 Greenway Circle, Lawrence, Kansas, 66046. 800-255-4255 B. Convergent Concrete Specialty Chemical Concrete Treatments. 450 South 1325 West Orem, Utah 84058. (801) 375-2280. C. Metzger McGuire. P.O. Box 2217 Concord, NH 03302. (603) 224-6122 DIAMOND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR 035400 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa D. L&M Construction Chemicals. 101 10t Street. Pittsburgh, PA 15229. (800) 362-3331 E. RBC Industries. 80 Cypress Streeet. Warwick, RI 02888. (888) 722-3769. F. Tnemec. 6800 Corporate Drive Kansas City, MO 64120 (800) 863-6321 G. General Polymers. 145 Caldwell Drive. Cincinnati, OH 45216. (800) 543-7694. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Lithium Densifiers: 1. Consolideck LS by Prosoco 2. Pentrasil 244+ or Pentrasil IH by Convergent Concrete Specialty Chemical Concrete Treatments 3. LiON Hard by L&M Construction Chemicals . B. Stain Inhibitor: 1. Consolideck Polish Guard Guard by Prosoco 2. Pentrafinish HP by Convergent Concrete Specialty Chemical Concrete Treatments. 3. Permaguard by L&M Construction Chemicals C. Crack Repair 1. Rapid Refloor by Metzger McGuire (color selected by ALDI) 2. Quick Mendor by VersFlex (color selected by ALDI) D. Epoxy Grout Coat. Install if directed by Aldi or its agents: 1. 100% solid, clear epoxy a. UVLV RBC Industries b. Series 237 by Tnemec c. 3589 by General Polymers (Sherwin Williams) PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: The General Contractor shall examine areas and conditions under which work will be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION AND GRINDING A. New Concrete – Sales floor: 1. Newly placed concrete shall be sufficiently cured for a recommended 28 days prior to the application of the densifier. Grinding may begin when the concrete achieves 70% of its design strength. 2. Do not use liquid curing materials that leave a bond barrier to densifier penetration, especially dissipative cures. 3.. The following grinding steps shall be included both in the sales floor areas as well as all edges. Note that sequencing shall be finalized during the mock up. a. Fill control and isolation joints per section 033170. Uneven joint filler color shall not be acceptable. b. 16 grit metal bond polish c.. 25 grit metal bond polish d.. 40 grit metal bond polish e. 80 grit metal bond polish f.. 100 grit resin bond polish g.. 200 grit resin polish DIAMOND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR 035400 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa h. Apply densifier per section 3.3 i. 400 grit resin bond j. 800 grit resin bond k. Apply stain shield per section 3.4 m. Burnish the floor with a 1500 grit pad on a high speed floor burnisher with a minimum rpm of 2000. n. An additional coat of stain shield shall be applied after ALDI’s operation has stocked the store and just prior to the store’s opening. Existing Concrete: 1. Remove existing flooring (if any). If the contractor believes the existing flooring contains asbestos, he shall not proceed without further written instruction from Aldi or its agents. 2. Remove existing flooring adhesives (if any). Removal method shall be grinding in such a manner not to produce a level of aggregate exposure greater than shown in the photograph below. 3. After the removal of existing flooring and adhesives (if any), the floor shall be inspected by Aldi and its agents to determine: a. If an epoxy grout coat is needed b. Crack repair criteria All repairs shall be made per the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Perform a test to determine what level of grinding diamonds will be required to completely remove any potential bond barrier. If no bond barrier is apparent, then proceed to diamond grinding as described in Paragraph A above for New Concrete 5. Areas to polished shall be the entire sales floor, the impact door entrance into the back room and underneath the milk doors. All steps included in 3.2, A, 5 shall be included in the bid. Final determination of required work shall be determined as outlined in 1.3, G (mock up). 6. Areas where existing flooring will be removed, but are not part of the work described in 3.2, B, 2 shall receive a four step grinding and polishing process consisting of 2 metal bond passes and two resin bond passes. These areas shall not receive densifier. These areas will receive curing compound as described in section 033000 of the specification. Finishes of non-Sales floor concrete shall be determined after evaluation by Owner and their consultants. The finished concrete shall be a salt and pepper finished as shown in the photograph below. The purpose of this picture is to show only the level of aggregate exposure. Sheen to be approved by owner based on mock up results. 3.3 APPLICATION OF COMMERCIAL DENSIFIER FOR POLISHED CONCRETE A. Apply according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Densifier shall be kept wet with densifier for a minium of 20 minutes. 3.4 APPLICATION OF STAIN INHIBITOR A. Following final diamond polishing steps, clean floor with water and white pad or brush, and allow to thoroughly dry prior to application of stain shield. Apply two applications of Stain Shield, allowing floor to dry between applications. Following final application, burnish floor with a high-speed burnisher with 1500 grit Twister or Norton pads. DIAMOND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR 035400 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect floor from traffic and water for at least 72 hours after final application of the stain shield. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. This scope of work shall contain a maximum of three mobilizations. Initial grinding shall be performed prior to vestibule installation. B. New Concrete 1. Approximately seven days after concrete placement and prior to interior wall construction, a portion of the metal bond work shall be performed. 2. At least 28 days following concrete placement and after interior wall construction is complete, the final portion of the balance of the works shall be completed. 3. After all construction is complete and just prior to opening, the aisle ways shall receive the final coat of stain inhibitor the ailes shall be burnished with a 1500 grit pad on a high speed floor burnisher with a minimum rpm of 2000. 4. A two mobilization schedule obtained by combining item 1 and 2 above may be utilized if approved by ALDI. C. Existing Concrete 1. As required by the general contractor and prior to interior wall construction & existing concrete removal, a portion of the metal bond work shall be performed. 2. After interior wall construction is complete, the final portion of the balance of the works shall be completed. 3. After all construction is complete and just prior to opening, the aisle ways shall receive the final coat of stain inhibitor the ailes shall be burnished with a 1500 grit pad on a high speed floor burnisher with a minimum rpm of 2000. D. Coordination details shall be finalized during the mock up process. ALDI MOCK UP REQUIREMENTS 1. Intent: establish expectations for the finished polished floor. 2. Area zu 100 sf zzu On the sales floor under future shelving 3. Items to be mocked up: zu Sales floor area zzu Edge work (can be simulated by anchoring a 2”x4” if necessary) zzzu Control joint filling 4. Items to be reviewed and approved: zu Level of aggregate exposure zzu Quality of edge work zzzu Overall appearance of the work 5. Items expected to be available at the mock up: zu Joint filler vii. Mop and bucket zzu Densifier viii. Autoscurbber (if needed) zzzu Guard products ix. Broom zÝu Acetone x. Microfiber Ýu Measuring container xi. Polishing equipment Ýzu Rags 1. Polishing machine 2. Edge grinders 6. Required personnel 3. Diamonds zu ALDI DIAMOND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR 035400 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa zzu CRT (if requested by the DoRE) zzzu GC zÝu Polishing subcontractor i. At least one employee from the polishing subcontractor who will be on site for the entire polishing process shall attend the mock up. END OF SECTION DIAMOND POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR 035400 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's). 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Face brick. 4. Cast Stone water table trim. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels for unit masonry. 2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of exposed masonry unit and colored mortar. C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches by 48 inches high by full thickness. C. Cast Stone Standard: Comply with the requirements of the Cast Stone Institute Technical Manual 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength for exposed units and where indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block. C. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi. 2. Density Classification: Normal weight. D. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Water Table Field CMU; Biltmore Tan #3546 by CEMEX or approved equal. 1) Contact: Todd Cox @ (864) 313-6901. 2) Local supplier can be used if prototypical color can be matched. Local supplier to be approved by ALDI Representative prior to ordering. 2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi. 3. Density Classification: Normal weight. 4. Pattern and Texture: a. Standard pattern, split-face finish. 2.3 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216. 1. Products: Provide the following – verify manufacturer specification with owner: a. Hanson Brick 1) Field: Old Williamsburg, code 630 UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2) Accent: Moultrie Vista, Code 556 b. Belden Brick 1) Modular ALDI Blend 2) Accent: Modular ALDI Blend, gas flashed flat set c. Acme Brick: 1) Field: TUP Blend 2; consisting of 75% TUP Blend 2 Garnet and 25% TUP Blend 5 Tuscany. 2) Accent: Napa Valley 2. Grade: SW. 3. Type: FBX. 4. Texture: Velour 5. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 6. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 7. Size: Modular (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long. 2.4 CAST STONE WATER TABLE TRIM A. Architectural Cast Stone 1. Basis of Design -The Cast Stone Company Tannerstone: (770) 463-1932 2. Units: As indicated on the drawings. 3. Color: std white 4. Local supplier can be used if prototypical color and shape can be matched. Local supplier to be approved by ALDI Representative prior to ordering. 5. Physical properties – provide the following: a. Compressive strength - ASTM c 1194: 6,500 psi (45 mpa) minimum for products at 28 days. b. Absorption - ASTM c 1195: 6% maximum by the cold water method, or 10% maximum by the boiling method for products at 28 days. c. Air content – ASTM c173 or c 231, for wet cast product shall be 4-8% for units exposed to freeze- thaw environments. air entrainment is not required for vdt products. 6. Job site testing – one (1) sample from production units may be selected at random from the field for each 500 cubic feet (14 m3) delivered to the job site. a. Three (3) field cut cube specimens from each of these samples shall have an average minimum compressive strength of not less than 85% with no single specimen testing less than 75% of design strength as allowed by aci 318. b. Three (3) field cut cube specimens from each of these samples shall have an average maximum cold-water absorption of 6%. c. Field specimens shall be tested in accordance with ASTM c 1194 and c 1195. B. Raw materials 1. Portland cement – type i or type iii, white and/or grey, ASTM c 150. 2. Coarse aggregates - granite, quartz or limestone, ASTM c 33, except for gradation, and are optional for the vdt casting method. 3. Fine aggregates - manufactured or natural sands, ASTM c 33, except for gradation. 4. Colors - inorganic iron oxide pigments, ASTM c 979 except that carbon black pigments shall not be used. 5. Admixtures- comply with the following: a. ASTM C 260 for air-entraining admixtures. b. ASTM C 494 for water reducing, retarding or accelerating admixtures. c. Other admixtures: integral water repellents and other chemicals, for which no ASTM standard exists, shall be previously established as suitable for use in concrete by proven field performance or through laboratory testing. d. ASTM C 618 mineral admixtures of dark and variable colors shall not be used in surfaces intended to be exposed to view. e. ASTM C 989 granulated blast furnace slag may be used to improve physical properties. tests are required to verify these features. f. Water – potable g. All anchors, dowels and other anchoring devices and shims shall be standard building stone anchors commercially available in a non-corrosive material such as zinc plated, galvanized steel, brass, or stainless steel type 302 or 304. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Color and finish 1. All surfaces intended to be exposed to view shall have a fine-grained texture similar to natural stone, with no air voids in excess of 1/32 in (0.8 mm) and the density of such voids shall be less than 3 occurrences per any 1 in.2 (25 mm2) and not obvious under direct daylight illumination at a 5 ft (1.5m) distance. 2. Units shall exhibit a texture approximately equal to the approved sample when viewed under direct daylight illumination at a 10 ft (3 m) distance. a. ASTM d 2244 permissible variation in color between units of comparable age subjected to similar weathering exposure. 1) Total color difference – not greater than 6 units. 2) Total hue difference – not greater than 2 units. b. Minor chipping resulting from shipment and delivery shall not be grounds for rejection. minor chips shall not be obvious under direct daylight illumination from a 20-ft (6 m) distance. D. Curing 1. Cure units in a warm curing chamber approximately 100ºf (37.8ºc) at 100 percent relative humidity for approximately 12 hours, or cure in a 100 percent moist environment at a minimum 70ºf (21.1ºc) for 16 hours after casting. additional yard curing at 95 percent relative humidity shall be 350 degree-days (i.e. 7 days @ 50°f (10°c) or 5 days @ 70°f (21°c)) prior to shipping. form cured units shall be protected from moisture evaporation with curing blankets or curing compounds after casting. E. Manufacturing tolerances 1. Cross section dimensions shall not deviate by more than ±1/8 inch (3 mm) from approved dimensions. 2. Length of units shall not deviate by more than length/ 360 or ±1/8 inch (3 mm), whichever is greater, not to exceed ±1/4 inch (6 mm). a. Maximum length of any unit shall not exceed 15 times the average thickness of such unit unless otherwise agreed by the manufacturer. 3. Warp, bow or twist of units shall not exceed length/ 360 or ±1/8 inch (3 mm), whichever is greater. F. Production quality control 1. Test compressive strength and absorption from specimens selected at random from plant production. 2. Samples shall be taken and tested from every 500 (14 m3) cubic feet of product produced. 3. Perform tests in accordance ASTM c 1194 and c 1195. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Holcim (US) Inc.; Holcim Mortarmix Masonry Cement, Hanson color by Holcim #761 b. Decorative CMU’s mortar color; match color #75D Sand Beige by Hanson. E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA. H. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. I. Water: Potable. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.187-inch diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units. C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer. C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. 1. Wire: Fabricate from 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.25- inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. E. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors: UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. 2. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 213 or D/A 210 with D/A 700-708. 2) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; 315-D with 316. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10 or DW-10HS. 4) Wire-Bond; 1004, Type III or RJ-711. b. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, having slotted holes for inserting wire tie. c. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.075-inch-thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. d. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.25-inch-diameter, hot- dip galvanized steel wire. F. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated. 2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet bonded between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Fabric Thru-Wall Flashing. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing. 4) Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper. 5) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 6) York Manufacturing, Inc.; Multi-Flash 500. B. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents. E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat. b. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net. 2. Provide one of the following configurations: a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches high, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep. 2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc. 2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water- repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. 4. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1) Holcim (US) Inc.; Holcim Mortarmix Masonry Cement, Hanson color by Holcim #761 2) Decorative CMU’s mortar color; match color #75D Sand Beige by Hanson. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 7 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi. 3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.2 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 8 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 3.6 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Embed tie sections, connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than 1 inch of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter. 3.8 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 9 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 3. At openings, install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 4. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with loose-fill insulation. D. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. 3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner may engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Level 2 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. D. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. E. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. 3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 10 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 2. Protect surfaces and light fixtures from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 7. Any effluent or excess runoff must be treated and released in accordance with all federal state and local requirements. 3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 042000 UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 11 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes structural steel and grout. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications”, “Steel Decking, and “Steel Joists”. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualification: The Fabricator shall maintain a quality assurance program to ensure that the work is performed in accordance with the requirements in the AISC Steel Construction manual and the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. The Fabricator’s Quality Assurance program shall be submitted for review. The names of all qualified personnel and persons-in-charge shall be listed along with their appropriate certificates of competence/compliance. B. Installer Qualifications: The Installer shall maintain a quality assurance program to ensure that the work is performed in accordance with the requirements in the AISC Steel Construction manual and the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. The Installer’s Quality Assurance program shall be submitted for review. The names of all qualified personnel and persons-in-charge shall be listed along with their appropriate certificates of competence/compliance. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, Grade 50. C. Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B. B. Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, weldable, straight. 1. Finish: Plain. C. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 2.4 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360. B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless noted on drawings. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Base and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened unless noted on drawings. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. K-series steel joists. 2. KCS-type K-series steel joists. 3. K-series steel joist substitutes. 4. Joist girders. 5. Joist accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by the Steel Joist Institute (SJI) to manufacture joists complying with SJI standard specifications and load tables. B. SJI Specifications: Comply with SJI's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (hereafter, SJI's "Specifications") that are applicable to types of joists indicated. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for web and steel-angle chord members. B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts 1. Finish: Plain. C. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. 2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K- Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord. 1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists. B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members. STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.3 JOIST GIRDERS A. Manufacture joist girders according to "Standard Specifications for Joist Girders" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members and with end and top-chord arrangements as indicated. 2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. B. Bridging: Schematically indicated. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's "Specifications." Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. C. Supply ceiling extensions in areas of building with ceilings, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated. D. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist installation. 2.5 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories. Apply 1 coat of shop primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with Research Council on Structural Connections' "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high- strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements. E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof deck. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. C. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group. 2. Consolidated Systems, Inc. 3. Epic Metals Corporation. 4. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 5. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. 6. United Steel Deck, Inc. 7. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation. 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following: 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 minimum, with one of the following primers: STEEL DECKING 053100 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa a. Shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer, color: Manufacturer's standard. b. Shop primed with Armorchem Grey Deck Coating LH – Product Number WC-25110C 2. Deck Profile: Type WR, wide rib. 3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0295 unless noted on drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, requirements in this Section, and as indicated and as indicated on drawings. B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. G. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck as pre-approved by project structural engineer. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. H. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches. I. Roof Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches apart with at least one fastener at each corner. 1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and mechanically fasten. STEEL DECKING 053100 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa J. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 3.3 REPAIRS A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. END OF SECTION 053100 STEEL DECKING 053100 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior load-bearing wall framing. 2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 1. For V2.0 and V3.0 Prototype Buildings, cold-formed metal framing shall comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. For V4.0 Prototype Buildings, a structural analysis is not required as the design information is on the drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design." 2. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: ST33H ST50H. 2. Coating: G60. 2.2 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: as indicated on drawings. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch unless noted on drawings. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches unless noted on drawings. 2.3 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. F. Vertical deflection clips shall be manufacturer’s standard bypass and head clips capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to the stud web. G. Single deflection track shall be manufacturer’s single, deep-leg, u-shaped steel track, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and with a web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement with flanges designed to support horizontal loads. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching. D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths. D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. F. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.3 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows: 1. Anchor Spacing: As shown on Shop Drawings. B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations. D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated. G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. 2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs. H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported. I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 48 inches. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches deep. J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure. K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. 3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to primary building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. 2. Pre-manufactured ‘snap-in’ type bridging may be used at the contractor’s option. 3. Install a row of bridging within 12” of single deflection tracks. F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable curtain-wall-framing system. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Steel angle corner guards. 3. Metal ladders for roof access. 4. Miscellaneous steel trim. 5. Metal bollards. 6. Pipe guards. 7. Tube steel bumper. 8. Flat steel. 9. Stainless steel bumper. 10. Anodized Aluminum Entry Door Protectors 11. Cart rails. 12. Starter posts. 13. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 14. Steel pallet bumpers. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. E. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793. F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. H. Slotted Channel Framing (unistrut): Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches. 2. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33; 0.0966-inch minimum thickness; unfinished. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze. B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329. C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. B. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. F. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air- entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches o.c. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 2.7 STEEL CORNER GUARDS A. Provide at interior plywood finish. B. Fabricate guards with L 1¼” x 1¼” x 1/8”. C. Provide 7’-6” high at all location except provide 6’-6” high at man door at receiving. D. Prime guards with zinc-rich primer. 2.8 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Construct ladder per OSHA requirements 2. Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 3. Siderails: Continuous, 1-3/4” by 3” tubes with 1/8” wall thickness. 4. Rungs: 1-1/4” by 1-1/4” tube with 1/8” wall thickness. a. Serrated surfaces on rungs. b. Capable of 1,000 pound load. 5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 6. Provide nonslip abrasive surfaces on top of each rung. 7. Wall brackets: 2" by 1/4" thick steel flat bars. 8. Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners. 9. Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with primer specified in Division 09 Section. 10. Ladders shall be installed per manufacturer's specifications and shall stay minimum 2” clear of the top of the 6" pallet bumper. C. Optional Steel Ladder: ACL-200, heavy duty Hatch Access or approved equal. For ordering information contact: ACL Industries, 52 Maple Street, Manchester, NH 03103, Phone: (603) 668-1276 FAX: (603) 668-1281. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim. D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer. 2.10 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. B. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer. 2.11 PIPE GUARDS A. Fabricate pipe guards from 3/8-inch- thick by 12-inch- wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4- inch anchor bolts. B. Galvanize pipe guards. 2.12 TUBE STEEL BUMPERS A. Fabricate steel bumpers from 4”x2”x3/16” steel tubing. 1. Cap ends of bumpers with 3/16-inch thick steel plate. B. Install bumpers as detailed on the drawings for bolting to concrete slab. Drill for 3/4-inch anchor bolts. C. Provide 36 linear feet of loose tube steel, exact location and length to be coordinated with Owner. D. Prime bumpers with zinc-rich primer. 2.13 FLAT STEEL A. Fabricate flat steel for merchandise gondolas from 4” x ¼” steel plate. 1. Provide (6) L-shaped pieces at 13’-0” x 3’-0”. On the 13’-0” side, provide ¼” diameter holes 6” from each end and at 1’-4” o.c. between those holes. On the 3’-0” side, ¼” diameter holes shall be 10” from each end. 2. Provide (4) straight pieces at 12’-0”. Provide ¼” diameter holes 6” from each end and at 1’-4” o.c. between those holes. B. Install flat steel as directed by ALDI construction representative based on merchandise gondola layout. C. Prime flat steel with zinc-rich primer. 2.14 STAINLESS STEEL BUMPERS A. Fabricate stainless steel bumpers from 10ga material. 1. Cap ends of bumpers with finished end caps. B. Install bumpers as detailed on the drawings for inside Mounting Brackets. Drill for 3/4-inch anchor bolts. C. Finish: #4 Satin Finish. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa D. Product as manufactured by ‘Tarpening – LaFollette Co’. For pricing and ordering, contact either Chad Martin (cmartin@tarp-laff.com) or Kim Martin (kmartin@tarp-laff.com)Tel: 317-780-1500. 2.15 ANODIZED ALUMINUM ENTRY DOOR PROTECTORS A. Provide Anodized Aluminum 12” l. x 1.875” diameter entry door protectors. 1. Sliding Automatic Doors require 3/4 round entry door protectors. 2. Swinging Automatic Doors require 1/2 round entry door protectors. B. Install bumpers as directed by ALDI construction representative to protect against damage from carts. C. Finish: #4 Satin Finish. D. Product as manufactured by ‘Tarpening – LaFollette Co’. For pricing and ordering, contact either Chad Martin (cmartin@tarp-laff.com) or Kim Martin (kmartin@tarp-laff.com)Tel: 317-780-1500. 2.16 CART RAILS A. Fabricate cart rails from 1-1/2” diameter x 13’-0” long galvanized (rigid conduit, heavy wall tube). B. Install legs into the center of a 4” diameter hole core drilled into canopy slab. Anchor using non-shrink grout so that finished height (top of horizontal rail) is 35” above adjacent canopy slab. C. Bend pipe into “U” shape to provide a 72” horizontal length, and vertical legs with 6” radius at the corners. D. Prime rails with zinc-rich primer. 2.17 STARTER POSTS A. Fabricate metal posts from 3” diameter Schedule 40 steel pipe. 40” galvanized steel posts at canopy as indicated on the drawings (see Keyed Note). Install into center of 6” diameter hole core drilled into canopy slab. 1. Cap posts with “Dome” shaped, non-threaded fencing post cap. B. Anchor using non-shrink grout, so that the finished height to top of post is 35” above adjacent canopy slab. C. Prime posts with zinc-rich primer. 2.18 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. 2.19 STEEL PALLET BUMPERS A. Fabricate pallet bumpers with 6” x 3 ½” x 5/16” steel angle LLV. B. Attach pallet bumper angles to floor with ¾” diameter x 4” expansion bolts at 48” o.c. C. Joints in all pallet bumper angles and tubes shall have continuous full penetration welds at exposed faces and ground moderately smooth. D. Fill with concrete after placement – slope up to wall 1” above height of steel angle. E. Note special requirements for pallet bumper at back room double doors as shown on drawings. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.20 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. 2.21 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.22 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.23 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 3.2 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing. B. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. D. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. C. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel pipe and tube railings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 STEEL AND IRON A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513. B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Provide the following: 1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating. B. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. D. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. B. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. C. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. D. Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings. E. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces. F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers to transfer loads through wall finishes. 2.5 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware. B. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning. D. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. B. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. C. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into preset metal pipe sleeves and grouting annular space. D. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges. E. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction. F. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces. G. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. H. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. 3. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 057000 - DECORATIVE METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Closures and Trim. 2. Filler Panels. 3. Column Covers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STAINLESS STEEL A. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304. B. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. 2.2 STEEL AND IRON A. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010. B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Sheet, Cold Rolled: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel or structural steel, exposed. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Aluminum Items: Aluminum fasteners. 2. Stainless-Steel Items: Stainless-steel fasteners. 3. Steel Items: Plated steel fasteners with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 electrodeposited zinc coating unless otherwise indicated. 4. Dissimilar Metals: Stainless-steel fasteners. B. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion type. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated. 1 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Groupstainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Brazing Rods: For copper alloys, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be brazed and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items. C. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. DECORATIVE METAL 057000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa E. Universal Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. F. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. G. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Water-based galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#134. H. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Form decorative metal to required shapes and sizes, true to line and level with true curves and accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris. B. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. C. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding and brazing. Weld and braze behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 1. Where welding and brazing cannot be concealed behind finished surfaces, finish joints to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 Welds: no evidence of a welded joint. 2.6 COLUMN COVERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Tarpening – LaFollette Co.; 22ga material. a. Offset vertical joints with 1-inch overlap. b. Riveted installation as shown on the drawings. c. Finish: #4 Satin Finish. B. Install one-piece sheets to outside face of columns at locations and to comply with details indicated. Use stainless steel clamps and rivets recommended by metal fabricator that will prevent telegraphing, dimpling, and oil canning. C. Product as manufactured by ‘Tarpening – LaFollette Co’. For pricing and ordering, contact either Chad Martin (cmartin@tarp-laff.com) or Kim Martin (kmartin@tarp-laff.com)Tel: 317-780-1500. 2.7 CLOSURES AND TRIM A. Install closures and trim in one one-piece sheets at locations and to comply with details indicated. Use fasteners and rivets recommended by metal fabricator that will prevent telegraphing, dimpling, and oil canning. 2.8 FILLER PANELS A. Install filler panels in one-piece sheets at locations and to comply with details indicated. Use fasteners and rivets recommended by metal fabricator that will prevent telegraphing, dimpling, and oil canning. 2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. DECORATIVE METAL 057000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.10 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. B. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6. 2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize products made from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, castings, plates, bars, and strips indicated to be galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Hot-dip galvanize steel and iron hardware indicated to be galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Preparing Galvanized Items for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean decorative metal of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. C. Preparing Nongalvanized Items for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning. D. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of items unless otherwise indicated. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. 1. Shop prime uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces with universal shop primer indicated. 2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure decorative metal to in-place construction. B. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated, uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. D. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required. E. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses. F. Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work. G. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. END OF SECTION 057000 DECORATIVE METAL 057000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Wood furring and grounds. 4. Wood sleepers. 5. Wood shelving. 6. Plywood wall boards and backing panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide a minimum flame spread range of 76-200 (Class ‘C’): provide at all exposed locations. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl spaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds. 6. Utility shelving. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species. C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or 2 Common (Sterling) grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 3. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. 2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. Use Exterior type for all locations and where indicated. 2. Provide a minimum flame spread range of 26-75 (Class ‘B’). B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 SHELVING A. Shelving: Made from the following material, 3/4-inch thick. B. DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. C. Standards and Brackets Adjustable shelving supports shall be 6’-0” long (or as noted) No. 87ANO- Anachrome Heavy duty, with vertical shelf standards at 16” o.c. with 12” No. 187 heavy duty wall brackets as manufactured by Knape and Vogt or approved equal. Provide and install vertical shelf rails for the utility room shelving. Color of the shelf rails and brackets shall be Anochrome. Attach standards into studs or wood backing. Color of fasteners shall match shelf standards. 2.6 PLYWOOD WALL PROTECTION AND BACKING PANELS A. Wall Protection: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, A-C Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2- inch nominal thickness. B. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, A-C Plugged, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness. 2.7 FASTENERS A. General: Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. D. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Building wrap. 3. Sheathing joint-and-penetration treatment. 4. Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Building wrap. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick. 2. Provide Dens Deck at all back of wall parapet sheathing. General Contractor to verify substrate compatibility with Roofing Contractor prior to installation of parapet wall sheathing. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated. 1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide fasteners with corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. 2.3 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap. b. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek CommercialWrap. c. Reemay, Inc.; Typar MetroWrap. 3. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 63 g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). SHEATHING 061600 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Building-Wrap Tape: Tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer. 2.4 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers. B. Sheathing Tape for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." B. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that exclude exterior moisture. C. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. 3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials. 3.3 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 2. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings. 3. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings. 4. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller. END OF SECTION 061600 SHEATHING 061600 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Marlite; Standard FRP or comparable product by one of the following: a. Kemlite Company Inc. b. Nudo Products, Inc. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch 3. Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture. 4. Color: P-151, Light Gray. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: Match panels. B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. C. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches wide. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install trim accessories with adhesive. Do not fasten through panels. D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. F. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION 066400 PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Perimeter insulation under slabs. 2. Perimeter wall insulation (supporting backfill). 3. Concealed building insulation. 4. Vapor retarders. 5. Sound attenuation insulation. 6. Open-Cell Spray Polyurethane Foam 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame- spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: 1. Available Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products Division. 2. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2 with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, based on tests performed on unfaced core on thicknesses up to 4 inches. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Rmax, Inc. 2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Available Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning. B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. C. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation at all exterior walls to be a minimum of R-19. 2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS (AT WALLS) A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively. B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers. D. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates. E. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and with demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated. 2.5 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. 2.6 OPEN-CELL SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM A. Available Manufactures: 1. Icynene Inc., Tel: 800-758-7325 2. NCFI Polyurethanes, Tel. 800-346-8229 x2305 a. Product: Sealite 12-002 3. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 012500 B. Polyicynene Spray Insulation: Icynene; hydrophobic, low-density, open-cell modified polyicynene; conforming to the following: 1. Thermal Resistance (R-Value/inch): ASTM C518; 3.6 hr/sq ft/degree F/BTU. (RSI 0.62 hr/m2/degree C/W). 2. Air Permeance: ASTM E283; 0.0049 l/m2/second for 5.25 inches(133 mm) of material. 3. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 10 perms for 5 inches (127 mm) of material THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 4. Sound Transmission Class (STC): ASTM E90; STC 37 in wood stud wall. 5. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM E90; NRC-0.7 in wood stud wall. 6. Corrosion: No significant corrosion when in contact with steel under 85 percent relative humidity and 118 degrees F. 7. Bacterial or Fungal Growth: No growth; no material deterioration. 8. Fuel Contribution: ASTM E84; 0. 9. Oxygen Index: ASTM D2863; average value 23.1 percent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. C. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection course with joints butted. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions. D. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection course with joints butted. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm-in-winter side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. D. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. E. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: 1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. 2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation. 3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. 4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles. F. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c. C. Before installing vapor retarder, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor- retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor- retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. F. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor- retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.7 INSTALLATION OPEN-CELL SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that substrate and cavities are free of any foreign material that will impede application. C. Verify that other work on and within spaces to be insulated is complete prior to application. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa E. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions F. Remove foreign materials, dirt, grease, oil, paint, laitance, efflorescence, and other substances that will affect application. G. Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from overspray or damage. H. Apply insulation in accordance with manufacturer's written application instructions. Apply insulation to a uniform density without voids. I. Voids of exposed steel framing at tower to be entirely filled by spray foam. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. 3.9 INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation under slab @ cooler/freezers: Type IV extruded-polystyrene board insulation. B. Perimeter wall insulation (supporting backfill): Foil-faced, polyisocyanurate board insulation. C. Concealed building insulation: Unfaced, glass-fiber blanket insulation. D. Sound attenuation Insulation: Unfaced, glass-fiber blanket insulation END OF SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 074213 - METAL SOFFIT PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal soffit panels. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures: a. Uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward. 2. Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/240 of the span. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and field-assembled work. B. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required. 1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. 1.0 mil total dry film thickness: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa b. Siliconized-Polyester: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil for primer and 0.8 mil for topcoat. 3. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. B. Panel Sealants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920 as recommended in writing by metal wall panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated. B. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: 1. Nominal Thickness: 0.025 inch. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. 2.4 METAL SOFFIT PANELS A. Provide factory-formed solid soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. B. Metal Soffit Panels: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Basis of Design: Petersen Aluminum Corporation PAC-750. 1) Exterior Finish: Clear anodized at canopy soffit; Kynar 500 at building outrigger and tower outrigger. 2) Color: Clear Anodized at canopy soffit; Slate Gray at building outrigger and tower outrigger. b. Firestone UNA-CLAD UC-750. 1) Exterior Finish: Kynar 500 at building outrigger, tower outrigger, and canopy. 2) Color: Silver Metallic at canopy soffit; Slate Gray at building outrigger and tower outrigger. 2. Profile: V groove. 3. Material: Aluminum sheet, 0.032 inch thick. 4. Panel Coverage: 12-inch. 5. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Soffit Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal soffit panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal soffit panels, unless otherwise indicated. METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal wall panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal soffit panels. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal soffit panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Fabricate metal soffit panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals. C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. D. Fabricate metal soffit panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous soffit panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal soffit panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Metal Soffit Panels: Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing. 1. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where metal soffit panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings. 3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. After metal soffit panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. END OF SECTION 074213 METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 074243 - COMPOSITE WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes metal-faced composite wall panels. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 330: 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on the following minimum design wind pressures: a. Uniform pressure of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward. 2. Deflection Limits: Metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with horizontal deflections no greater than 1/175 of the span at the perimeter and 1/60 of the span anywhere in the panel of the span. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal-faced composite wall panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish among factory-, shop-, and field-assembled work. B. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal-faced composite wall panels identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal-faced composite wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal-faced composite wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required. 1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes: COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 074243 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. 3. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. B. Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING A. Miscellaneous Metal Framing, General: ASTM C 645, cold-formed metallic-coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 hot-dip galvanized or coating with equivalent corrosion resistance unless otherwise indicated. B. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: 1. Nominal Thickness: 0.040 inch. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221. B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal- faced composite wall panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. 2.4 METAL-FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANELS A. General 1. Fire-Retardant Core: Noncombustible, with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Basis of Design: Laminators Incorporated Clip & Caulk System; 3255 Penn St., Hatfield, PA 19440. Tel: (215)723-8107 b. ALPOLIC; 401 Volvo Parkway, Chesapeake, Virginia 23320. Tel: (800) 422-7270 B. Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.032-inch- thick, coil-coated aluminum sheet facings. 1. Panel Thickness: 0.236 inch. 2. Core: Standard corrugated polyallomer (CPA) core with backer sheet. 3. Panel Backing: Random painted aluminum sheet, 0.015 inches (0.381 mm) thick, ASTM B209 aluminum sheet. 4. Bond Test Performance: ASTM C481-A Cyclic Aging: Pass. 5. Exterior Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer (Kynar 500). a. Color: 1) See drawings for colors. C. Attachment System Components: Formed from material compatible with panel facing. COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 074243 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Include manufacturer's standard perimeter extrusions with integral weather stripping, panel stiffeners, panel clips and anchor channels. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal-faced composite wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal-faced composite wall panels unless otherwise indicated. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.030-inch- minimum thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal-faced composite wall panels. Provide a 12 inch (305 mm) wide lap strap under the flashing at abutted conditions and seal lapped surfaces with a full bed of non- hardening sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, base angles, sills, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support members and anchorage according to ASTM C 754 and metal-faced composite wall panel manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 METAL-FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A. Attachment System Installation, General: Install attachment system required to support metal-faced composite wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels. 1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery, and panel- system joint seals. 2. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by composite panels are installed. B. Clip Installation: Attach panel clips to supports at each metal-faced composite wall panel joint at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to panel clips with manufacturer's standard fasteners. 1. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent panels with sealant backing and sealant. Install sealant backing and sealant according to requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal-faced composite wall panel assembly. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal-faced composite wall panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 074243 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal-faced composite wall panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal- faced composite wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. After metal-faced composite wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. END OF SECTION 074243 COMPOSITE WALL PANELS 074243 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Preformed joint sealants. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant SS-1: ASTM C 920. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems. b. Dow Corning Corporation. c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones. d. May National Associates, Inc. e. Pecora Corporation. f. Polymeric Systems, Inc. g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. h. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. i. Tremco Incorporated. j. Custom Building Products – Polyblend Siliconized Caulk 2. Type: Single component (S). 3. Grade: Nonsag (NS). 4. Class: 100/50. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT). B. Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant SS-2: ASTM C 920. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems. b. Dow Corning Corporation. c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones. d. May National Associates, Inc. e. Pecora Corporation. f. Polymeric Systems, Inc. g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. h. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. i. Tremco Incorporated. 2. Type: Single component (S). 3. Grade: Nonsag (NS). 4. Class: 100/50. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT). C. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Joint Sealant SS-3: ASTM C 920. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems. b. Dow Corning Corporation. c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones. d. May National Associates, Inc. e. Pecora Corporation. f. Polymeric Systems, Inc. g. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. h. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. i. Tremco Incorporated. 2. Type: Single component (S). 3. Grade: Nonsag (NS). 4. Class: 100/50. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Nontraffic (NT). 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Urethane Joint Sealant US 1: ASTM C 920. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Lymtal, International, Inc. d. May National Associates, Inc. e. Pacific Polymers International, Inc. f. Pecora Corporation. g. Polymeric Systems, Inc. h. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. i. Sika Corporation; Construction Products Division. j. Tremco Incorporated. 2. Type: Multicomponent (M). 3. Grade: Pourable (P). 4. Class: 50. 5. Uses Related to Exposure: Traffic (T). 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Joint Sealant LS-1: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems. b. Bostik, Inc. c. May National Associates, Inc. d. Pecora Corporation. e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. f. Tremco Incorporated. 2.5 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant PS-1: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals. b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd. c. Sandell Manufacturing Co. d. Schul International, Inc. e. Willseal USA, LLC. 2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint- sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. F. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces JS-1. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Joints between different materials listed above. 2. Joint Sealant: US-1. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-2. 1. Joint Locations: a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. c. Joints between metal panels. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers. f. Control and expansion joints in overhead surfaces. 2. Joint Sealant: SS-1. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces JS-3. 1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. 2. Joint Sealant: US-1. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-4. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry, walls and partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. 2. Joint Sealant: LS-1. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range of colors. E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS-5. 1. Joint Locations: a. Exposed joints within aluminum entrance framing systems. 2. Joint Sealant: SS-2. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. F. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces JS- 6. 1. Joint Sealant Location: JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. In toilet rooms and break room. 2. Joint Sealant: SS-3. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range of colors. G. Joint-Sealant Application: Joints between millwork and wall surfaces JS-7. 1. Joint Sealant Location: a. Joints between wall and sacking counter b. Joints between wall and Break Room Counter c. Joints between wall and Office Counter 2. Joint Sealant: SS-1. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: Polyblend Haystack #380 END OF SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Standard hollow metal window frame. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details. B. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Firedoor Corporation. 7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 8. Habersham Metal Products Company. 9. Kewanee Corporation (The). 10. Mesker Door Inc. 11. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 12. Security Metal Products Corp. 13. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 14. Windsor Republic Doors. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa H. Glazing: Division 08 Section "Glazing." I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. a. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: R-value of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush). D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet . 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Preferred: Fabricate frames as face welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Retrofit Applications: Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. 4. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2- inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- wide steel. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. B. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high. b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers. D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 electrical Sections. 2.8 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. b. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. c. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. d. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. END OF SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes manually operated sectional doors. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. B. Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward and outward. C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to ASTM E 283 or DASMA 105. 1. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. at 15 and 25 mph. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Fabricate from manufacturer's standard zinc-coated (galvanized), cold- rolled, steel sheet. 1. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weathertight seal, with a reinforcing flange return. 2. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction, separating the exterior and interior faces of door. B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not more than 48 inches apart. C. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa D. Thermal Insulation: Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard CFC-free insulation, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections that incorporate the following interior facing material, with no exposed insulation: 1. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet. 2.2 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches apart for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel track reinforcement and support members. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. C. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated. D. Track Protection: By owner; Note that overhead door locks shall be modified as required to accommodate Track Protection. E. Viewer: Provide one (1) 698 viewer by the H.B. Ives Company for the overhead door, mounted at 5’-0” a.f.f. Viewer to be provided overhead door contractor. 2.3 HARDWARE A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type. B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails. C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Provide 3-inch- diameter roller tires for 3-inch- wide track and 2-inch- diameter roller tires for 2-inch- wide track. D. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized-steel lifting handles on each side of door. 2.4 LOCKING DEVICES A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both jambs side, operable from inside only. 2.5 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated. B. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. C. Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa D. Cable Safety Device: Include, on each side-edge of door, a device designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks. E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag. F. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. 2.6 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS A. Equip door with manufacturer's recommended manual door operator unless another type of door operator is indicated. B. Push-up Operation: Lift handles and pull rope for raising and lowering doors, with counterbalance mechanism designed so that required lift or pull for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf. 2.7 DOOR ASSEMBLY – Door 110B A. Steel, Insulated Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Coplay Building Products; a Griffon company: Clopay Model 3220 b. Overhead Door Corporation: Thermacore 591 Series. c. Raynor:Series TC200 . B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 10,000. C. Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, formed into sections 1-3/4 inches thick. 1. Exterior-Face Surface: Flat. 2. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. D. Track Configuration: High-lift track. E. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door. F. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock. G. Manual Door Operator: Push-up operation. H. Door Finish: 1. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard color. Exterior face to be painted on site. 2. Finish of Interior Facing Material: White (to remain unpainted) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Tracks: Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment. Repair galvanized coating on tracks according to ASTM A 780. C. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter. SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3.2 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors. END OF SECTION 083613 SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Storefront framing for punched openings. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Failure of operating units. B. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. C. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 2. Test Durations: 10 seconds. E. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.. F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static- air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. C. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or comparable product approved equal: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Tubelite. 3. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 4. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 5. YKK AP America Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC- PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Nonthermal at interior locations and Thermally broken for exterior locations. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3. Glazing Plane: Center. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M. E. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Provided by Owner; see Appendix ‘B’ Section 084229 Automatic Entrances. 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. D. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections if required by local municipality. B. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. D. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. 1. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. 2. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and frame. b. Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device. c. Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer. 1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, and Owner about door hardware and keying. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 2.2 HINGES, GENERAL A. Template Requirements: provide only template-produced units. B. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 2. Interior Hinges: Brass, with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads. 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin. C. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for outswinging exterior doors and as noted in the hardware sets. D. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Screws: Phillips flat-head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.3 HINGES A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. B. Template Hinge Dimensions: BHMA A156.7. C. Manufacturers: 1. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL A. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. C. Lock Trim: 1. Levers: RHO, Rhodes. D. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors. E. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. F. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply with the following: 1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2. B. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2, Grade 1; Series 4000. 1. Manufacturer: a. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). 2.6 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. The actuating portion portion of the releasing device shall extend at least one-half of the door leaf width. E. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. F. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on metal doors. G. Manufacturer: 1. Precision Hardware, Inc. (PH). 2.7 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1. B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1. Number of Pins: Six. C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; with interchangeable cores. D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. a. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. E. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. F. Manufacturer: 1. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH). DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.8 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference into master key system. 1. Master Key: Master key to operate Doors 107 and 108. B. Keys: Nickel silver; permanently inscribed with a visual key control number and including the notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 1. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide three cylinder change keys and five master keys. 2.9 CLOSERS A. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: 1. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 2. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open door to minimum required width. C. Hold-Open Closers/Detectors: Coordinate and interface integral smoke detector and closer device with fire alarm system. D. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. E. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: a. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC). F. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA A156.15. 1. Life-Safety Type: On release of hold open, door becomes self-closing. Automatic release is activated by loss of power. 2. Manufacturers: a. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (NDC). 2.10 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Refer to Section 102600 in Appendix ‘A’ and as noted on the drawings. B. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch thick stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. c. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. d. Hiawatha, Inc. e. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.; Div. of InPro Corporation. f. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa g. Pawling Corporation. h. Rockwood Manufacturing Company. i. Trimco. 2.11 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. 1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. B. Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1. C. Silencers for Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame. D. Available Manufacturers: 1. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. (ABH). 2. Baldwin Hardware Corporation (BH). 3. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated (BM). 4. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP). 5. Don-Jo Mfg., Inc. (DJO). 6. Door Controls International (DCI). 7. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH). 8. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (DOR). 9. Glynn-Johnson; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (GJ). 10. Hager Companies (HAG). 11. HES, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (HES). 12. Hiawatha, Inc. (HIA). 13. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS). 14. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX). 15. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM). 16. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT). 17. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH). 18. Trimco (TBM). 2.12 DOOR GASKETING A. Standard: BHMA A156.22. B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. C. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. D. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. E. Manufacturers: 1. National Guard Products (NGP). DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.13 THRESHOLDS A. Standard: BHMA A156.21. B. Accessibility Requirements: Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high. C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch high. D. Manufacturers: 1. National Guard Products (NGP). 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM). 2.14 FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. B. Fasteners: Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fasteners of door hardware in fire-rated applications. C. Finishes: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series. Drill and tap doors and frames for surface-applied door hardware according to ANSI A250.6. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." C. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SETS – for V2 Prototype Store Types. Door Hardware Set No. 100 Door No. 102A, 102B, 101A, 101B; provided by Owner, all door hardware provided complete by door manufacturer. Door Hardware Set No. 200 Door No. 104, 106; each to have the following: No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish 3 Hinges FBB179 STH 626 1 Privacy Lock ND40S SCH 626 1 Closing Devices 8501-BF-AL NDC AL 1 Wall Stop 402-1/2 IVS Al Door Hardware Set No. 300 Door No. 109: No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish 4 Hinges FBB-179-NRP STH 626 1 Storeroom Lock ND80PD SCH 626 1 Closing Devices w/Hold 1601-H NDC AL Open 1 Wall Stop 402-1/2 IVS AL Door Hardware Set No. 400 Door No. 107, 108; each to have the following: No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish 3 Hinges FBB179-NRP STH 626 1 Storeroom Lock ND80PD SCH 626 1 Closing Device 8501-BF-AL NDC AL 1 Door Viewer 698 IVS - Door Hardware Set No. 500 Door No. 103B: No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish 3 Hinges FBB179-NRP STH 630 1 Threshold 896N NGP AL 1 Exit/Panic 2101 PH 630 1 Closing Device 1601H NDC AL 1 Drip Strip 16A NGP Clear Anodized Al 1 Magnetic Perimeter Seal 159MA NGP Clear Anodized Al 1 Door Sweep 9605A NPG Clear Anodized Al Door Hardware Set No. 600 Door No. 110A: No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish 3 Hinges FBB179-NRP STH 630 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1 Threshold 896N NGP AL 1 Door Viewer 698 IVS - 1 Exit/Panic 2103x1703C PH 630 1 Closing Device 1601H NDC AL w/hold open 1 Drip Strip 16A NGP Clear Anodized Al 1 Magnetic Perimeter Seal 159MA NGP Clear Anodized Al 1 Door Sweep 9605A NGP Clear Anodized Al 3.4 DOOR HARDWARE SETS – for V3 and V4 Prototype Store Types. Door Hardware Set No. 100 Door No. 102A, 102B, 101A, 101B; provided by Owner, all door hardware provided complete by door manufacturer. Door Hardware Set No. 200 Door No. 104, 106; each to have the following: No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish 3 Hinges FBB179 STW 626 1 Privacy Lock ND40S SCH 626 1 Closing Devices 8501-BF-AL NDC AL 1 Wall Stop 402-1/2 IVS AL 1 12” h. Protection Plate 8400 IVS AL Door Hardware Set No. 300 Door No. 110D: No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish 4 Hinges FBB-179-NRP STH 626 1 Storeroom Lock ND80PD SCH 626 1 Closing Devices w/Hold 1601-H NDC AL Open 1 Wall Stop 402-1/2 IVS AL 1 42” h. Protection Plate 8400 IVS AL Door Hardware Set No. 400 Door No. 107, 108; each to have the following: No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish 3 Hinges FBB179-NRP STH 626 1 Storeroom Lock ND80PD SCH 626 1 Closing Device 8501-BF-AL NDC AL 1 Door Viewer 698 IVS - 1 42” h. Protection Plate 8400 IVS AL Door Hardware Set No. 500 Door No. 103B, 110C: No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish 3 Hinges FBB179-NRP STH 630 1 Threshold 896N NGP AL 1 Exit/Panic 2101 PH 630 1 Closing Device 1601H NDC AL 1 Drip Strip 16A NGP Clear Anodized Al 1 Magnetic Perimeter Seal 159MA NGP Clear Anodized Al 1 Door Sweep 9605A NPG Clear Anodized Al DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa Door Hardware Set No. 600 Door No. 110A,: No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish 3 Hinges FBB179-NRP STH 630 1 Threshold 896N NGP AL 1 Door Viewer 698 IVS - 1 Exit/Panic 2103x1703C PH 630 1 Closing Device 1601H NDC AL w/hold open 1 Drip Strip 16A NGP Clear Anodized Al 1 Magnetic Perimeter Seal 159MA NGP Clear Anodized Al 1 Door Sweep 9605A NPG Clear Anodized Al END OF SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2. Storefront framing. 3. Glazed entrances. 4. Silvered flat Laminated glass mirrors for observation mirror used in office window opening. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. B. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Safety Glazing Products: For laminated mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. D. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. GLAZING 088000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass. C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. C. Uncoated Tinted Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified (only used for V2 and V3 Prototype Store Type). 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pilkington North America; Gray High-performance Tinted Float Glass : 2. Tint Color: Gray. 3. Visible Light Transmittance: 46 percent minimum. D. Uncoated Tinted Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified (only used for V2 and V3 Prototype Store Types). 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Zeledyne; Versalux Gray Tinted Float Glass : a. Alternate Products subject to approval by ALDI Construction Representative 1) PPG Solargray 2) AGC Solarshield 2. Tint Color: Gray. 3. Visible Light Transmittance: 46 percent minimum. E. Translucent Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified (only used for V2 and V3 Prototype Store Types). 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pilkington North America; Optifloat Opal Float Glass : a. Alternate Products subject to approval by ALDI Construction Representative 1) PPG/Walker Glass acid etched GLAZING 088000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2) AGC Matelux 2. Pattern: Acid Etched. 3. Light Transmittance: 82 percent minimum. F. Silicone-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C, Type I, Quality-Q3, and complying with other requirements specified (only used for V3 Prototype Store Type). 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 2. AFG Industries, Inc. 3. Guardian Industries Corp. 4. Pilkington North America: Pilkington Spandrel Glass. 5. PPG Industries, Inc.: Opaci-Coat -300 Silicone Spandrel (Basis-of-Design Product). 6. Approved Equal. 7. Glass: Clear float. 8. Tint Color: none. 9. Silicone Coating Color: Dark Gray as selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range of gray colors. 2.3 LAMINATED GLASS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFG Industries, Inc. 2. Guardian Industries Corp. 3. Pilkington North America 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Approved Equal. B. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. C. Laminated Mirrors: Office window Glazing; ASTM C 1172, Kind LM; Pilkington Mirropane transparent mirror. 2.4 INSULATING GLASS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AFG Industries, Inc. 2. Guardian Industries Corp. 3. Pilkington North America 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Approved Equal. B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. GLAZING 088000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.5 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing. 2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Applications: Provide @ exterior. C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Applications: Provide @ interior. 2.7 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. GLAZING 088000 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.9 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type GL-1: Clear fully tempered float glass; @ Automatic Doors, Interior Vestibule and cart enclosure when required. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling. B. Glass Type GL-S: Silicone-coated spandrel glass, fully tempered float glass (only used for V3 Prototype Store Type). 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Coating Location: Second surface. 3. Fallout Resistance: Passes fallout-resistance test in ASTM C 1048 for an assembly of glass and adhered reinforcing material. 2.10 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type GL-2: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass; Pilkington Energy Advantage Low-E. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on third surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 74 percent minimum. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.33 maximum. 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.33 maximum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .67 maximum. 11. Provide safety glazing labeling. 2.11 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type GL-3: Low-e-coated, tinted insulating glass (only used for V2 and V3 Prototype Store Types). 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Gray High-performance Tinted Float Glass. 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass; Pilkington Energy Advantage Low-E. 6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on third surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 7 percent minimum. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.33 maximum. 9. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.33 maximum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.15 maximum. 11. Provide safety glazing labeling. B. Glass Type GL-4: Tinted, insulating translucent laminated glass (only used for V2 and V3 Prototype Store Types). 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted fully tempered float glass -Zeledyne; Versalux Gray Tinted Float Glass. GLAZING 088000 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 4. Interspace Content: Air. 5. Indoor Lite: Pilkington North America; Optifloat Opal Float Glass, translucent laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered float glass. a. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3.0 mm. b. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch. 6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .47 maximum. 7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .50 maximum. 8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .48 maximum. 9. Provide safety glazing labeling. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 3.2 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. GLAZING 088000 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. END OF SECTION 088000 GLAZING 088000 - 7 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter. C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, in size indicated on Drawings. D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch. B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch. D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel. E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare-steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire. H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. 3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. C. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. D. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z- furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. END OF SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. B. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting, wall graphics and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum Co. b. BPB America Inc. c. G-P Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple. h. USG Corporation. i. Approved Equal. B. Regular Type: 1. Thickness: 1/2 Inch at all areas. 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. C. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Gypsum Co. b. BPB America Inc. c. G-P Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple. h. USG Corporation. 2. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: ‘Tear Away L Bead’ by Trim-Tex Drywall Products; provide at bottom of gypsum board sales-floor side of Cooler and Freezer. e. L-Bead: ‘Tear Away L Bead’ by Trim-Tex Drywall Products; provide at top of gypsum board at all sales floor walls. f. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. g. Expansion (control) joint. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 4. Foil-Backed Type: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 3.3 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. B. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840, GA-216, and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. L-Bead: ‘Tear Away L Bead’ by Trim-Tex Drywall Products; provide at bottom of gypsum board sale-floor side of Cooler and Freezer. 5. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 093000 - TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Quarry Tile for information and coordination with Owner; see Tile product QT-1 for contractor responsibility specific to this product. Quarry Tile is used only on V2.0 and V3.0 Prototype buildings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: 1. Each type and composition of tile and grout for each color and finish required. 1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE PRODUCTS A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. Tile Type QT-1: Unglazed square-edged quarry tile. This tile is provided by owner; V2.0 and V3.0 Prototype buildings only. 1. Quarry tile flooring will be done directly for Owner by others. General Contractor shall schedule the flooring work prior to beginning any interior finish work. Allow two weeks for installation and one week for curing the flooring prior to use by any heavy equipment. 2. Contractor responsibility: a. General Contractor shall unload tile which will include approximately 35 pallets measuring 4' x 3' x 4' and weighing approximately 3,000 lbs. each. Check pallets for same production run number and if any variation exists, notify Owner representative immediately. 3. Only wheeled equipment having non-marking wheels shall be allowed on quarry tile. 4. Contractor shall thoroughly clean tile immediately prior to occupancy by Owner. Cleaning method shall not cause damage to tile or joint system. Muratic acid or similar cleaning agents may be used if required to thoroughly clean tile surface; however, the specific product and its application shall be approved by the quarry tile installer. C. Tile Type CT-2: glazed paver tile; at Bread Area; V2.0 and V3.0 Prototype buildings only. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by: a. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. (Request ALDI national account pricing) 2. Composition: Porcelain. 3. Face Size: 11-7/8 by 11-7/8 inches. TILING 093000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 5. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with square or cushion edges. 6. Finish: Mat, clear glaze. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: Terra Antica, TA02 Rosso. 8. Grout Color:Polyblend Sanded Grout by Custom Building Products - Camel #384. D. Tile Type CT-3: Glazed paver tile; at Toilet Rooms. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. (Request ALDI national account pricing) 2. Composition: Porcelain. 3. Face Size: 12 by 12 inches 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 5. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges. 6. Finish: Mat, clear glaze. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: Salerno Series – SL83 Marrone Chiaro. 8. Grout Color: Polyblend Sanded Grout by Custom Building Products – Earth #105. 9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base CB-1: 6”x12” coved base. 2.2 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company. b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. c. Bostik, Inc. d. C-Cure. e. Custom Building Products. f. Jamo Inc. g. Laticrete International, Inc. h. MAPEI Corporation. i. Mer-Kote Products, Inc. j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. l. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 2. Prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added. 3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar. 2.3 GROUT MATERIALS A. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following a. Custom Building Products. 2. Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. TILING 093000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer. b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Magic Seal. c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978. d. Custom Building Products; Grout Sealer. e. Jamo Inc.; Penetrating Sealer. f. MAPEI Corporation; KER 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile. g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer. h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer. i. TEC, a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone Grout Sealer. C. Metal Edge Strips: 1. ADA Compliant – Angle shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; Aluminum, brushed exposed-edge material. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that can be incorporated include: 1) Schluter – Reno-u, product number AU 125 ATGB. 2. Tile edge trim, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for wainscot applications; Aluminum, brushed exposed-edge material. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that can be incorporated include: 1) Schluter – Rondec-DB, product number DB 14 AE. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free of coatings that are incompatible with tile- setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing. C. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: TILING 093000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa a. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. E. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Quarry Tile: per Owner. 2. Ceramic Tile: 3/16 inch. F. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.4 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Tile Installation F113: Thin-set mortar; TCA F113. a. Tile Type: CT-2, CT-3. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set Latex-portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout. B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation W243: Thin-set mortar on gypsum board; TCA W243. a. Tile Type: CT-3. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set Latex-portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout. END OF SECTION 093000 TILING 093000 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 3 full boxes. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire. E. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. F. Hold-down Clips: Provide at Entry and Exit Vestibules. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Georgian, Tegular product No.1752, Class A. 2. To obtain preferred national account pricing, call Armstrong at 800-442-4212 option #1. 3. Substitution only as approved by Owner. C. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa D. Color: White. E. LR: Not less than 0.86. F. NRC: Not less than 0.55, Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795. G. CAC: Not less than 35. H. Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled, kerfed and rabbeted. I. Thickness: 5/8 inch. J. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; 15/16” Prelude. 2. To obtain preferred national account pricing, call Armstrong at 800-442-4212 option #1. C. Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. 3. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 4. Cap Finish: Painted white. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 1. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. END OF SECTION 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one the following: a. Roppe Corporation, USA. b. Approved Equal. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group II (layered). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe). C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. H. Finish: Satin. I. Colors and Patterns: 1. 193 “Black/Brown” at all locations RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic- cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 099100 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete Pallet Bumper. 2. Steel. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Wood. 5. Gypsum board. 6. Cotton or canvas insulation covering. B. This Section, also, includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Galvanized metal. 3. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: For each type of product and color indicated. B. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. PAINTING099100 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Duron, Inc. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Provide paints with a flame spread range of 76-200 (Class C) at all exposed locations. C. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule, and as selected by owner. 2.3 BLOCK FILLERS 1. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4. a. VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2.4 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI #3. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. B. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50. 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): Prep-Rite 200 – B28W200 2. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer 253. 3. VOC Content: E Range of E1. 4. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1. C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated. 2.5 METAL PRIMERS A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79. 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish B66W1. 2. VOC Content: E Range of E1. B. Rust-Inhibitive Primer (Water Based): MPI #107. 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): PRO-CRYL Universal Primer B66-310 Series. 2. VOC Content: E Range of E1. 3. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1. C. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. 2.6 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1. PAINTING099100 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.7 LATEX PAINTS A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 0.5. B. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1. C. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2. 2.8 ALKYD PAINTS A. Interior Alkyd (Flat): MPI #49 (Gloss Level 1). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. B. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1. 2.9 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS A. Exterior Latex (Flat): MPI #10 (Gloss Level 1). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. B. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. C. Exterior Latex (Gloss): MPI #119 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at 60 deg). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2.10 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Flat): MPI #8 (Gloss Level 1). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E1. B. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #94 (Gloss Level 5). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. C. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (gloss): MPI #9 (Gloss Level 6). 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Wood: 15 percent. 3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. PAINTING099100 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. G. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. H. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. I. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. PAINTING099100 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 2. Electrical Work: a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. c. Electrical piping and conduits. d. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 1. Alkyd System – PT-1: MPI INT 3.1D. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (semigloss). B. Steel Substrates: 1. Alkyd System – PT-2: MPI INT 5.1E – Sales 103 Overhead @ exposed ceilings. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd Rust-Inhibitive primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (flat). 2. Alkyd System – PT-3: MPI INT 5.1E. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (semigloss). C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Alkyd System – PT-4: MPI INT 5.3C – Sales 103 Overhead @ exposed ceilings. a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (flat). 2. Alkyd System – PT-5: MPI INT 5.3C. a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (semigloss). D. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System – PT-6: MPI INT 9.2A. PAINTING099100 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer: Prep-Rite 200. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat) and (eggshell). 2. Latex System – PT-7: MPI INT 9.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer: Super Spec 253. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat) and (semigloss). E. Cotton or Canvas Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings. 1. Latex System – PT-8: MPI INT 10.1A. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat). 2. Alkyd Over Latex Primer System – PT-9: MPI INT 10.1B. a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (flat). 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. Alkyd System- PT-10: MPI EXT 5.1D. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss). B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Alkyd System- PT-11: MPI EXT 5.3B. a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss). C. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex Over Alkali-Resistant Primer System – PT-12: MPI EXT 4.2L a. Prime Coat: Alkali-resistant primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (as selected by owner). END OF SECTION 099100 PAINTING099100 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Handicapped Parking Sign: Contractor shall provide handicapped parking sign at each parking space which is federally approved or meets local handicap requirements as well as ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines. Mount on building to masonry. Mounting height: +96" @ cars and van (verify). 2. Banners: Contractor shall include the cost of hanging two Owner supplied "Soon Opening" banners and replacing with two "Now Open" banners at grand opening. Banners are 6' x 8' and are roped from the four corners; two over top of canopy and two down to canopy columns. Verify location with Owner representative. Banners shall be removed and returned to the Owner's representative after the "Grand Opening". 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 All interior signage shall be provided by Owner. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled- in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. B. Framing: Contractor to provide additional structural framing for the support of (Dimensional illuminated characters) Illuminated Channel Lettering. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate location of signs and accessories with Owner, using mounting methods complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions. SIGNAGE 101400 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Restore damaged finishes. Clean and protect work from damage. END OF SECTION 101400 SIGNAGE 101400 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility- Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 102400 - ROOF SCREENS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: . 1. Roof equipment screens and supporting steel framework 2. Roof screen accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 22, Section "Packaged rooftop air handling Units". 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design Loads: Comply with Building Code for site location and building height. 1. Design to resist ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 2. Design all materials, assembly and attachments to resist snow, wind, suction and uplift loading at any point without damage or permanent set. B. Access to HVAC Unit: provide access panels to permit unit servicing; coordinate with HVAC contractor for sizes and locations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. C. Coordination Drawings: drawn to scale, and coordinated with roof top units, using input from Installers of the items involved. D. Maintenance data. E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material. B. Storage and Handling: Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. ROOF SCREENS 102400 -1 ALDI Retail Facility- Iowa City, Iowa 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install products or materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of roofing materials to avoid damage to installed insulation and membrane materials. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. CityScapes Incorporated; Envisor Screening System. 2. Spinnaker Industries Inc.; Corrugated Sliding Panel System. 3. Eclipse Screen Systems; Skyline 2. 2.2 Envisor Screening System A. Pre-formed thermoplastic panel for enclosing roof top mechanical equipment: 1. Thermoformed plastic Panels: Fabricated from rigid medium impact thermo-formed ABS (Acrylic Butylene Styrene) sheets. a. Minimum thickness 3/16". 2. Framing: Aluminum Plate, Shapes and Bar: ASTM B 221, alloy 6061-T5 or 6063-T5. 3. Threaded Fasteners: All screws, bolts, nut and washers shall be Stainless steel. a. Corner assembly fasteners shall be #10-16 x stainless steel TEK screws. Length as required to develop full holding capacity of screw when fastened to Mechanical Equipment. b. Provide lock washer or other locking device at all bolted connections. B. Fabrication 1. Provide factory-formed panel systems with continuous interlocking panel connections and indicated or necessary components: Form all components true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or defects. Cut panels to precise lengths indicated on approved shop drawings. a. Panel Style and Height: 52" Vertical b. Panel Design: Wide Rib gage metal, and finished with the manufacturers standard coating 2. Trim and Closures: Fabricated from 24 system, unless shown otherwise on drawings. a. Provide top trim as indicated: Flat 3. Framing: Fabricate and assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to the site. a. Construct corner assemblies to required shape with joints tightly fitted. ROOF SCREENS 102400 -2 ALDI Retail Facility- Iowa City, Iowa b. Supply components required for anchorage of framing. Fabricate anchors and related components of material and finish as required, or as specifically noted. C. Finishes 1. Aluminum Framing: Mill. 2. Panel Coating: Manufacturer's standard coating system, factory-applied. a. Color: Selected from full range of manufacturer's standard colors. 2.3 Corrugated Sliding Panel System A. Pre-formed steel panels for enclosing roof top mechanical equipment: 1. .030, 22 gauge painted corrugated steel Panels. 2. Framing: Extruded Aluminum Tracks Shapes and Bar: ASTM B 221, alloy 6061-T5 or 6063-T5. 3. Threaded Fasteners: All screws, bolts, nut and washers shall be Stainless steel. a. Corner assembly fasteners Zink plated. Length as required to develop full holding capacity of screw when fastened to Mechanical Equipment. b. Provide lock washer or other locking device at all bolted connections. B. Fabrication 1. Provide ready-to-assemble factory panel system with connections and necessary components: Form all components true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or defects. 2. Trim and Closures: Fabricated and finished with the manufacturers standard coating system, unless shown otherwise on drawings. a. Provide top trim as indicated: Flat b. Construct corner assemblies to required shape with joints tightly fitted. C. Finishes 1. Aluminum Framing: Mill. 2. Panel Coating: Manufacturer's standard coating system, factory-applied. a. Color: Selected from full range of manufacturer's standard colors. 2.4 Skyline 2 A. Pre-formed metal panel for enclosing roof top mechanical equipment: 1. Galvalume metal sheet Panels: Fabricated from rigid sheets. 2. Framing: 18 ga LFQ, CQ, G-90 galvanized steel minimum. 3. Threaded Fasteners: All screws, bolts, nut and washers shall be Stainless steel. a. Corner assembly fasteners shall be #10-16 x stainless steel TEK screws. Length as required to develop full holding capacity of screw when fastened to Mechanical Equipment. b. Provide lock washer or other locking device at all bolted connections. B. Fabrication 1. Provide factory-formed panel systems all necessary components: form all components true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or defects. 2. Trim and Closures: Fabricated and finished with the manufacturers standard coating system, unless shown otherwise on drawings. 3. Framing: Fabricate and assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to the site. a. Construct corner assemblies to required shape with joints tightly fitted. ROOF SCREENS 102400 -3 ALDI Retail Facility- Iowa City, Iowa C. Finishes 1. Galvanized Framing: Paint per specifications. 2. Panel Coating: Manufacturer's standard coating system, factory-applied. a. Color: Selected from full range of manufacturer's standard colors. 2.5 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions before installation; coordinate with Roofing and HVAC. 2.6 PROTECTION A. Ensure that finishes and structure of installed systems are not damaged by subsequent construction activities. 1. If minor damage to finishes occurs, repair damage in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; provide replacement components if repaired finishes are unacceptable to Architect. B. Remove and replace components that are damaged. END OF SECTION 102400 ROOF SCREENS 102400 -4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Warm-air dryers. 3. Under-lavatory guards. 4. Custodial Accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Maintenance data. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.4 WARRANTY Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES AC1 - Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bobrick Washroom Equipments, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley Corporation; Model 5241-50. 3. Description: Double-roll dispenser. 4. Mounting: Surface mounted. 5. Operation: Non-controlled delivery; core cannot be removed until roll is empty. 6. Capacity: Designed for 4-1/2 or 5-inch diameter tissue rolls. 7. Material and Finish: Die cast aluminum bracket with gray plastic spindle and stainless steel spring. AC2 - Paper Towel (Roll) Dispenser: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bobrick Washroom Equipments, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Bradley Corporation; Model 259. 3. Description: Lever-actuated mechanism permits controlled delivery of paper rolls in preset lengths per stroke. No controlled delivery in break room. 4. Mounting: Surface mounted. 5. Minimum Capacity: Standard core paper towels to 6” diameter. 6. Material and Finish: Die cast aluminum with stainless steel spring. TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa AC3 - Grab Bar: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bobrick Washroom Equipments, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; Model B-6806 3. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 4. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin) on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area. 5. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 6. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings, and as follows: a. Straight, 36 inches long. b. Straight, 18 inches long. c. Straight, 42 inches long. AC4 - Mirror Unit: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bobrick Washroom Equipments, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; Model B-293 24x36TILT 3. Frame: Stainless steel, fixed tilt. a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. One-piece, galvanized-steel, wall-hanger device with spring-action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. 5. Size: As indicated on Drawings. AC5 - Warm-Air Dryer: 1. Manufacturers: Excel Dryer Corporation, 357 Chestnut Street, PO Box 365, East Longmeadow, Massachusetts 01028; 413-525-4531; www.exceldryer.com 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Excel Dryer Corporation; Xlerator XL-BW 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch. a. Operation Time: 35 seconds. 5. Cover Material and Finish: Composite Cover, White. 6. Electrical Requirements: 115 V, 20 A, 2300 W. AC6 - Underlavatory Guard: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. b. Truebro by IPS Corporation 2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings. 3. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white. 2.2 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Contractor shall provide seven Stanley Hardware # 752001-Zinc Plated Giant Tool storage clips, for mop hooks, three spaced equally on each side of shelf above each service sink and one located 4" to the side of each service sink faucet. Attach six to horizontal steel angles of shelf support brackets and one to wall plywood. Note that a to- tal of fourteen mop hooks are required. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446. END OF SECTION 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 102813 - MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Coat hooks. 2. Shelves. 3. Hooks. 4. Vertical louver blinds, PVC vanes, to be installed at break room window 5. Roller shades, be installed at office window. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products passing flame-resistance testing according to NFPA 701 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Product Standard: Provide vertical louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS (Commercial Steel), Type B. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, CS (Commercial Steel), Type B; with G60 zinc (galvanized) coating designation. C. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Concealed Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 HOOKS A. Heavy-Duty Coat Hooks: Stanley 752380- 3” heavy-duty coat hooks, zinc coated finish, in Backroom as indicated on the drawings; provide 4. B. Hooks: Provide office clip board hanging hooks; Stanley No. 752840- 1 ½” screw hook, bright zinc plated. (4) hooks per 1 x 4 @ 10" o.c. C. Hooks: provide two Stanley No. 8332 vinyl coated storage hooks at +6’-0" adjacent to each battery charger shelf to hang ends of charger cables. Verify exact location with Aldi representative. D. Hooks: Provide two Stanley No. 756105 coat hooks at 48” a.f.f. in coat closet in break room. E. Hooks: Provide two Stanley No. 756105 coat hooks at 48” a.f.f. on restroom side of restroom doors. 2.3 VERTICAL LOUVER BLINDS, PVC VANES A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Levolor, A Newell Rubbermaid Company; LouverDrape or a comparable product. B. Rail System: Headrail. 1. Rails: Extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; channel-shaped, enclosing operating mechanisms. a. Anodized aluminum, clear anodized. MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 102813 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Vanes: Lead-free, UV-stabilized, integrally colored, opaque, permanently flexible, extruded PVC that will not crack or yellow; with flat profile and not less than 3/8-inch overlap when vanes are rotated fully closed. 1. Nominal Vane Width: 4 inches. D. Vane Directional Control: Manual. E. Traversing Control: Manual. F. Draw and Stack Position: Coordinate with Owner. G. Louver Bottom: Connecting or spacing chains. H. Mounting: End mounting. I. Stack Release: Permitting stacked vanes to be moved away from stacking position for total access to glazed opening. J. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: Desert Sand, verify with Owner prior to ordering. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure detention toilet accessories rigidly in place and to support expected loads. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated items to adjoining construction. Reinforce formed-metal units as needed to attach and support other construction. 2.5 VERTICAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION A. Product Description: Vertical louver blind consisting of equally spaced, synchronized vanes and rail system with self-aligning carrier mechanisms, carriers, traverse and vane directional mechanisms and controls, and installation hardware. B. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 1. Louver Directional and Traversing Control Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows: 1. Blind Units Installed between (inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than head-to-sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. D. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting headrail, valance, and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting method indicated. E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use. F. Color-Coated Finish: For metal components exposed to view, unless anodized or plated finish is indicated. Apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. 2.6 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION A. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1. Shade Units Installed between (Inside) Jambs: Edge of shade not more than 1/4 inch from face of jamb. Length equal to head to sill dimension of opening in which each shade is installed. MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 102813 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated. 2.7 Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of detention toilet accessories. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of detention toilet accessories. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing accessories to in-place construction B. Install vertical louver blinds level and plumb and located so exterior vane edges in any position are not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in headrail. C. Jamb Mounted: Install headrail flush with face of opening jamb and head. D. Head Mounted: Install headrail on face of opening head. E. Adjust vertical louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely and free of binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. F. Clean vertical louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware. H. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. I. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 102813.63 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 102813 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket indicated. Furnish and install five 10#, ABC fire extinguishers and brackets. Purchase and install after verifying number and required, locations. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC. d. Approved equal. 2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 10lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. 2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked- enamel finish. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa c. Potter Roemer LLC. d. Approved equal. B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 124840 - FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES A. Contractor shall install a Grand Entrance walk-off mat at Entry 101. Tile installer to verify actual size with owner. a. For V2.0 and V3.0 Prototype Buildings: The Owner's Sales floor tile installer will install aluminum frame for the recessed mat and will bring "mortar bed" up to required elevation and install mat per manufacturer’s recommendations. b. For V4.0 Prototype Buildings: The entry mat is surface mounted and installed by the GC. B. ALDI DoRE to determine type of material (carpet or abrasive) for mat insert. ENTRY MAT 124840 - 1 ALDI, INC. NEW STORE ORDER FORM Grand Entrance Jen MacCarthy (Midwest Territory Sales Manager) - 888/424-6287 jmaccarthy@c-sgroup.com (Customer Care) - 888/424-6287 Fax: 908/849-4295 geoders@c-sgroup.com Please fax orders to 908/849-4295 or email georders@c-sgroup.com Bill-to Contractor: Ship To: Address: Phone: Fax: Order Date: Email Address: Contact Name: Contact Phone: Please select insert type & mat type. Clear anodized finish for all frame and rails. 1/2" Peditred LP w/ Poured Abrasive - Wrought Iron $33.58 per sq. ft. 1/2" Peditred LP w/ Carpet Inserts - Wrought Iron $24.81 per sq. ft. Recessed MatSurface Mounted Mat (Peditred LP Recessed Level Based Frame)(Peditred LP Surface Mounted Tapered Ramp Frame) $1.88 per lin. Ft.$2.98 per lin. Ft. Qty:Size:Traffic Direction: Date Required: Please sketch length, width & traffic flow (label each side with ALDI, INC. REPLACEMENT MAT ORDER FORM Grand Entrance Jen MacCarthy (Midwest Territory Sales Manager) - 888/424-6287 jmaccarthy@c-sgroup.com (Customer Care) - 888/424-6287 Fax: 908/849-4295 georders@c-sgroup.com Please fax orders to 908/849-4295 or email georders@c-sgroup.com Bill-to Contractor: Ship To: Address: Phone: Fax: Order Date: Email Address: Contact Name: Contact Phone: Please select mat depth, type, & insert type. Clear anodized fin 1/2" Peditred LP w/ Poured Abrasive - Wrought Iron3/4" Peditred $33.58 per sq. ft.$42.57 per sq. ft. 1/2" Peditred LP w/ Carpet Inserts - Wrought Iron3/4" Peditred w $24.81 per sq. ft.$31.30 per sq. ft. Recessed MatSurface Mounted Mat ***Helix System; Please contact Grand Entrance directly to obtain a quote*** please provide mat dimensions below and mark box. For Carpet replacement inserts only $1.10 per LF **8 LF of material needed per SF of mat Frame Replacement Only (if none selected, mat will ship without new frames) Peditred LP Surface Mounted Tapered Ramp FramePeditred Recessed $2.98 per lin. Ft.$3.98 per lin. Ft. Peditred LP Recessed Level Based Frame $1.88 per lin. Ft. Qty:Size:Date Needed: per sq. ft.Total Cost: Cost: Please sketch length, width & traffic flow (label each side with applicable dimension) ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Mechanical sleeve seals. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 6. Painting and finishing. 7. Supports and anchorages. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Mechanical sleeve seals. 2. Escutcheons. B. Welding certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-- Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION210500 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: PDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel, include two for each sealing element. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION210500 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.5 SLEEVES A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. B. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated C. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at slopes per NFPA 13. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. L. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION210500 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. N. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials. O. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. P. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. 3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper- phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 3.3 PAINTING A. Painting of fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting." B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. END OF SECTION 210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION210500 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 211000 - WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following fire-suppression piping inside the building: 1. Wet-pipe sprinkler systems. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Standard Piping System Component Working Pressure: Listed for at least 175 psig. B. Fire-suppression sprinkler system design based on NFPA 13 and shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water- service piping, valves, and backflow preventers. 2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: a. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 b. Sales Floor Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 c. Storage Areas and Backrooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 d. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 e. Office Areas: Light Hazard 3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area. b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area. 4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing. 5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: a. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft. b. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft. c. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13, unless otherwise indicated: a. Ordinary Hazard group 1 Occupancies: 250 gpm for 30 minutes 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Piping materials, including dielectric fittings, flexible connections, and sprinkler specialty fittings. WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS211000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2. Pipe hangers and supports. 3. Valves, including listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, and specialty valves and trim. 4. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics, mounting, finish, and other pertinent data. 5. Fire department connections, including type; number, size, and arrangement of inlets; caps and chains; size and direction of outlet; escutcheon and marking; and finish. 6. Alarm devices, including electrical data. B. Fire-hydrant flow test report. C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13 that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations, if applicable. D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14 Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping." E. Field quality-control test reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For standpipe and sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-suppression systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test. a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer. B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. C. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression-system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following: 1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems." 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounting, steel cabinet with hinged cover, with space for minimum of twelve spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler on Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS211000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified herein and on the drawings. 2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell end and plain end. 1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. 2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts and nuts. B. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with factory-formed, radius-cut-grooved ends according to AWWA C606. 1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems: a. Available Manufacturers: 1) Victaulic Co. of America. b. Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching ductile-iron-pipe OD. c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: AWWA C606, gasketed fitting matching ductile-iron-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching ductile-iron-pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated rubber gasket with center leg, and steel bolts and nuts. d. Grooved-End-Pipe Transition Coupling: UL 213 and AWWA C606, gasketed fitting with end matching ductile-iron-pipe OD and end matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with key matching ductile-iron-pipe groove and key matching steel-pipe groove, prelubricated rubber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts. e. Grooved-End Transition Flange: UL 213, gasketed fitting with key for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include flange-type, ductile-iron housing with rubber gasket listed for use with housing and steel bolts and nuts. 2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Threaded-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795, with factory- or field-formed threaded ends. 1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3. 3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4. 4. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method. 5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865. B. Plain-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795. 1. Locking-Lug Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with retainer lugs that require one-quarter turn to secure pipe in fitting. a. Available Manufacturers: 1) Anvil International, Inc. 2) Victaulic Co. of America. C. Grooved-End, Standard-Weight Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, ASTM A 135, or ASTM A 795, with factory- formed, square-cut ends. 1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems: WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS211000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa a. Available Manufacturers: 1) Anvil International, Inc. 2) Central Sprinkler Corp. 3) National Fittings, Inc. 4) Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div. 5) Victaulic Co. of America. b. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching steel-pipe OD. c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated rubber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts. D. Threaded-End, Threadable, Thinwall Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795, with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 and greater than Schedule 10, and with factory- or field-formed threaded ends. 1. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1. 2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3. 3. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4. 4. Steel Threaded Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. 5. Steel Threaded Couplings: ASTM A 865. E. Plain-End, Threadable, Thinwall Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795, with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 and greater than Schedule 10. 1. Locking-Lug Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with retainer lugs that require one-quarter turn to secure pipe in fitting. a. Available Manufacturers: 1) Anvil International, Inc. 2) Victaulic Co. of America. F. Plain-End, Threadable, Thinwall Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795, with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 and greater than Schedule 10. 1. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, and ASME B16.9 or ASME B16.11. 2. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5. G. Grooved-End, Threadable, Thinwall Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795, with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 and greater than Schedule 10, and with factory-formed, roll-grooved ends. 1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems: a. Available Manufacturers: 1) Anvil International, Inc. 2) Central Sprinkler Corp. 3) Ductilic, Inc. 4) JDH Pacific, Inc. 5) National Fittings, Inc. 6) Shurjoint Piping Products, Inc. 7) Southwestern Pipe, Inc. 8) Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div. 9) Victaulic Co. of America. 10) Ward Manufacturing. 11) <Insert manufacturer's name.> WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS211000 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa b. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching steel-pipe OD. c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated rubber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts. H. Grooved-End, Schedule 10 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795, Schedule 10 in NPS 5 and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10; with factory-field-formed, roll-grooved ends. 1. Grooved-Joint Piping Systems: a. Manufacturers: 1) Anvil International, Inc. 2) Central Sprinkler Corp. 3) Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div. 4) Victaulic Co. of America. b. Grooved-End Fittings: UL-listed, ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting with OD matching steel-pipe OD. c. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings: UL 213 and AWWA C606, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting matching steel-pipe OD. Include ductile-iron housing with keys matching steel-pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated rubber gasket listed for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts. 2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Flexible connectors shall have materials suitable for system fluid. Include 175-psig minimumworking-pressure rating and ends according to the following: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 2. Flexicraft Industries. 3. Flex-Pression, Ltd. 4. Flex-Weld, Inc. 5. Metraflex, Inc. 6. Unaflex Inc. C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose. 2.5 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY FITTINGS A. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 250-psig minimum working-pressure rating, and made of materials compatible with piping. Sprinkler specialty fittings shall have minimum working-pressure rating if fittings are components of high-pressure piping system. B. Outlet Specialty Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Central Sprinkler Corp. c. Ductilic, Inc. d. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div. e. Victaulic Co. of America. WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS211000 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2. Mechanical-T and -Cross Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron housing with gaskets, bolts and nuts, and threaded, locking-lug, or grooved outlets. C. Sprinkler Drain and Alarm Test Fittings: Cast-iron body; with threaded or locking-lug inlet and outlet, test valve, and orifice and sight glass. 1. Manufacturers: a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Fire-End and Croker Corp. c. Viking Corp. d. Victaulic Co. of America. D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fitting: Ductile-iron housing with threaded inlet and drain outlet and sight glass. 1. Manufacturers: a. AGF Manufacturing Co. b. Central Sprinkler Corp. c. G/J Innovations, Inc. d. Triple R Specialty of Ajax, Inc. E. Drop-Nipple Fittings: UL 1474, adjustable with threaded inlet and outlet, and seals. 1. Manufacturers: a. CECA, LLC. b. Merit. F. Indicating Valves: UL 1091, with integral indicating device and ends matching connecting piping. 1. Indicator: Visual. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Butterfly valve with cast- or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with flanged or grooved ends. a. Available Manufacturers: 1) Central Sprinkler Corp. 2) Grinnell Fire Protection. 3) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. 4) Milwaukee Valve Company. 5) NIBCO. 6) Victaulic Co. of America. 2.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Double Check Detector Assembly: (DCDA-1) 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product indicated on Drawing. 2.7 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES A. Valves shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Valves shall have 250-psig minimum pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping system. B. Ball Valves: Comply with UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc. 1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 2. Manufacturers: WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS211000 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa a. NIBCO. b. Victaulic Co. of America. C. Butterfly Valves: UL 1091. 1. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, or ductile-iron body; wafer type or with flanged or grooved ends. a. Manufacturers: 1) Central Sprinkler Corp. 2) McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. 3) Mueller Company. 4) NIBCO. 5) Victaulic Co. of America. D. Check Valves NPS 2 and Larger: UL 312, swing type, cast-iron body with flanged or grooved ends. 1. Manufacturers: a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. b. Central Sprinkler Corp. c. Grinnell Fire Protection. d. Hammond Valve. e. Mueller Company. f. NIBCO. g. Potter-Roemer; Fire Protection Div. h. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. i. Star Sprinkler Inc. j. Stockham. k. Victaulic Co. of America. E. Gate Valves: UL 262, OS&Y type. 1. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron body with flanged ends. a. Manufacturers: 1) Clow Valve Co. 2) Hammond Valve. 3) Milwaukee Valve Company. 4) Mueller Company. 5) NIBCO. 2.8 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Sprinkler System Control Valves: UL listed or FMG approved, cast- or ductile-iron body with flanged or grooved ends, and 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Control valves shall have 250-psig minimum pressure rating if valves are components of high-pressure piping system. 1. Manufacturers: a. Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Firematic Sprinkler Devices, Inc. c. Grinnell Fire Protection. d. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. e. Star Sprinkler Inc. f. Victaulic Co. of America. g. Viking Corp. WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS211000 - 7 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, designed for horizontal or vertical installation, with bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, single-hinge pin, and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer. a. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping. b. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping. 1) Manufacturers: a) Central Sprinkler Corp. b) Grinnell Fire Protection. c) Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. d) Star Sprinkler Inc. e) Viking Corp. B. Automatic Drain Valves: UL 1726, NPS 3/4, ball-check device with threaded ends. 1. Manufacturers: a. AFAC Inc. b. Grinnell Fire Protection. 2.9 SPRINKLERS A. Sprinklers shall be UL listed or FMG approved, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating. Sprinklers shall have 250-psig minimum pressure rating if sprinklers are components of high-pressure piping system. B. Sprinkler Schedule: Refer to Fire Protection drawings for Manufacturers, Model number, Type, Temperature rating, Flow rating, K-Factor and finishes. C. Sprinkler Guards: Wire-cage type, including fastening device for attaching to sprinkler within Coolers and Freezers. 2.10 ALARM DEVICES A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections. B. Electrically Operated Alarm: UL 464, with 8-inch-diameter, vibrating-type, metal alarm bell with red-enamel factory finish and suitable for outdoor use. 1. Manufacturers: a. Potter Electric Signal Company. b. System Sensor. C. Valve Supervisory Switch: UL 753, electrical, single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. Include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position. 1. Manufacturers: a. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. b. Potter Electric Signal Company. c. System Sensor. 2.11 PRESSURE GAGES A. Manufacturers: 1. AGF Manufacturing Co. 2. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS211000 - 8 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 3. Brecco Corporation. 4. Dresser Equipment Group; Instrument Div. 5. Marsh Bellofram. 6. WIKA Instrument Corporation. B. Description: UL 393, 3-1/2-diameter, dial pressure gage with range of 0 to 250 psig minimum. 1. Water System Piping: Include caption "WATER" on dial face. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Report test results promptly and in writing. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping connections before installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 PIPING APPLICATIONS, GENERAL A. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated or required. B. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe. C. Flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings with finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating may be used in aboveground applications, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Listed Fire-Protection Valves: UL listed and FMG approved for applications where required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. a. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, butterfly, or gate valves. 3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic piping joint construction. B. Threaded Joints: Comply with NFPA 13 for pipe thickness and threads. Do not thread pipe smaller than NPS 8 with wall thickness less than Schedule 40 unless approved by authorities having jurisdiction and threads are checked by a ring gage and comply with ASME B1.20.1. C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with listed coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. 1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Radius-cut-groove ends of piping. Use grooved-end fittings and grooved-end-pipe couplings. 2. Steel Pipe: Square-cut or roll-groove piping as indicated. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved- end-pipe couplings, unless otherwise indicated. D. Dissimilar-Metal Piping Joints: Construct joints using dielectric fittings compatible with both piping materials. WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS211000 - 9 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions, couplings, or nipples. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges. 3. NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange insulation kits. 3.6 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTION A. Connect fire-suppression piping to underground fire-suppression service piping provided by others. B. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to main underground water service. C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water supply. 3.7 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 21 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression" for basic piping installation. B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. 1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans. C. Use approved fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved joints. E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger connections. F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, sized and located according to NFPA 13. G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage. H. Install drain valves on standpipes. I. Install ball drip valves to drain piping between fire department connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building. J. Install alarm devices in piping systems. K. Hangers and Supports: Comply with NFPA 13 for hanger materials. 1. Install sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. L. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing. M. Fill wet-pipe sprinkler system piping with water. 3.8 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction. WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS211000 - 10 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve. C. Backflow prevention device is provided and installed by others in meter pit. D. Specialty Valves: 1. Alarm Check Valves: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, including bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection. 3.9 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect underground fire-suppression service piping to building fire-suppression piping. D. Connect piping to specialty valves, specialties, and accessories. E. Electrical Connections: Power wiring is specified in Division 26. F. Connect alarm devices to fire alarm. G. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." I. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.10 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. 4. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. 5. Coordinate with fire alarm tests. Operate as required. 6. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment. B. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. 3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish. C. Protect sprinklers from damage until Substantial Completion. 3.13 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS211000 - 11 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa END OF SECTION 211000 WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS211000 - 12 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Concrete bases. 10. Supports and anchorages. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons. B. Welding certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-- Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING220500 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1.6 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith-Blair, Inc. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING220500 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa f. Viking Johnson. 2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. 3. Underground Piping NPS 2and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling. 4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting. B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Eslon Thermoplastics. C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Thompson Plastics, Inc. D. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end. 1. AvailableManufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. c. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc. 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld- neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psigminimum working pressure at 180 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. D. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psigminimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING220500 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.7 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inchminimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. 2.8 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish. C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated. D. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw. 2.9 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING220500 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. L. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inchesabove finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inchannular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inchesabove finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. 1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout. 4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation. M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inchannular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inchesin diameter. 2. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inchannular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING220500 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. O. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. P. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. 3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. F. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. G. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING220500 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 3.5 PAINTING A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting." B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to “Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.7 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING220500 - 7 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermometers. 2. Gages. 3. Test plugs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves. B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers and gages indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, and location for each. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 2. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 5. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. B. Description: Direct-mounting, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers complying with ASME B40.3. C. Case: Dry type, stainless steel with 3-inch diameter. D. Element: Bimetal coil. E. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. F. Pointer: Red metal. G. Window: Glass or plastic. H. Ring: Stainless steel. I. Connector: Adjustable angle type. J. Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. K. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING220519 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2.2 THERMOWELLS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div. 2. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 3. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 4. Trerice, H. O. Co. 5. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 6. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. B. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used. C. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type, diameter, and length required to hold thermometer. 2.3 PRESSURE GAGES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div. 2. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 5. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. B. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with ASME B40.100. 1. Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum 4-1/2-inch diameter. 2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer: Red or other dark-color metal. 7. Window: Plastic. 8. Ring: Metal. 9. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale. 10. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure. C. Pressure-Gage Fittings: 1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type. 2. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure. 2.4 TEST PLUGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Trerice, H. O. Co. 2. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. B. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping. C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F. D. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves. METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING220519 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Insert material for water service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS A. Install bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers in the outlet of each domestic, hot-water heater. B. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers: 1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions. 3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS A. Install dry-case-type pressure gages for inlet and discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. B. Install dry case-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump. 3.3 INSTALLATIONS A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated. B. Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most readable position. C. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage. D. Install test plugs in tees in piping. E. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations. F. Install thermometers and gages adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance for thermometers, gages, and equipment. G. Adjust faces of thermometers and gages to proper angle for best visibility. END OF SECTION 220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING220519 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze angle valves. 2. Bronze ball valves. 3. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves. 4. Iron swing check valves. 5. Iron, grooved-end swing check valves. 6. Bronze gate valves. 7. Iron gate valves. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, and grooves. 3. Set angle, gate valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves. B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller. E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Gate Valves: With rising stem. 2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. 3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck. F. Valve-End Connections: 1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig . c. CWP Rating: 600 psig . d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full. B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig c. CWP Rating: 600 psig . d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full. 2.3 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig . c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Aluminum bronze. 2.4 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES A. Class 250, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa f. NIBCO INC. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Gasket: Asbestos free. 2.5 BRONZE GATE VALVES A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron 2.6 IRON GATE VALVES A. Class 125, NRS, Iron Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. B. Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: butterfly, or gate valves. 2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. 3. Throttling Service: Ball, or butterfly valves. 4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves: a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc. B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. 3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125 bronze disc. 3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with bronze trim. 4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: [Class 125] [Class 150], [bronze] [nonmetallic] disc. B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends. 2. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150. 3. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze or ductile-iron disc. 4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 250, metal seats. 5. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125 NRS END OF SECTION 220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and equipment: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Pipe stands. 6. Equipment supports. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT220529 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Manufacturers: 1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports. 3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 5. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 6. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 8. Tolco Inc. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Description: 100-psigminimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield. B. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc. 5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Value Engineered Products, Inc. C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier. D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass. E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inchesbeyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. H. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT220529 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. 2.5 PIPE STAND FABRICATION A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping. B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece recycled rubber unit dura-block with integral-clamp channel strut, pipe clamps, reflective yellow side striping, for roof installation without membrane penetration. Shall be LEED certified. 1. Manufacturer: Copper B-Line 2. Catalog Number: DB10 2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field- applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required. G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT220529 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20if longer ends are required for riser clamps. H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg Fpiping installations. 2. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. K. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.. L. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. M. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. D. Pipe Stand Installation: 1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. 2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs. E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT220529 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 12 inches) long and 0.048 inch thick. 3. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 4. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT220529 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa END OF SECTION 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT220529 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Valve tags. 5. Warning tags. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. D. Valve numbering scheme. E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT220553 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inchbond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inchthick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: Red. C. Background Color: White. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F . E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions. 2.3 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 incheshigh. 2.4 VALVE TAGS A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: Stainless steel, 0.025-inchminimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass beaded chain. B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inchbond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT220553 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 9 Section "Interior Painting.” B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 5. Spaced at maximum intervals of 20 feetalong each run. Reduce intervals to 10 feetin areas of congested piping and equipment. C. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Domestic Water Piping: a. Background Color: Blue. b. Letter Color: Black. 2. Sanitary Waste Piping: a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: Black. 3. Gas Piping: a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Red. 4. Storm Piping: a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Black. 3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing- in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT220553 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inchesG 2. Valve-Tag Color: a. Cold Water: Natural. b. Hot Water: Natural. c. Gas: Natural. 3. Letter Color: a. Cold Water: Black. b. Hot Water: Black. c. Gas: Red 3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required. END OF SECTION 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT220553 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Flexible elastomeric. b. Mineral fiber. 2. Adhesives. 3. Lagging adhesives. 4. Sealants. 5. Factory-applied jackets. 6. Field-applied jackets. 7. Tapes. 8. Corner angles. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any). B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 4. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 5. Detail application of field-applied jackets. C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. E. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. PLUMBING INSULATION2207000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180. E. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory- Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. b. Owens Corning. F. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied FSK jacket complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k- value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg For less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. PLUMBING INSULATION2207000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. D. FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. 2.3 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. PLUMBING INSULATION2207000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 136. 2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over equipment and pipe insulation. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.4 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 4. Color: White or gray. 2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 2.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories. 5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels. 6. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M. C. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mil-thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil. PLUMBING INSULATION2207000 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittwrap. b. Polyguard; Insulrap No Torch 125. 2.7 TAPES A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. b. Compac Corp.; 130. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width. 2.8 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PLUMBING INSULATION2207000 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inchesInstall insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. PLUMBING INSULATION2207000 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inchesbeyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.4 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe Insulation Installation: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces. 2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints. 3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches. 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at PLUMBING INSULATION2207000 - 7 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inchesover adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 3.6 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inchand seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inchoverlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. PLUMBING INSULATION2207000 - 8 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. 3.8 FINISHES A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance. D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.10 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Insulate indoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated. C. Domestic water, domestic hot-water insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. 3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Underground piping. 3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Cold Water: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. 2. NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. PLUMBING INSULATION2207000 - 9 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Domestic Hot Water: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be of the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. D. Storm Drain Piping: 1. Insulate entire length of horizontal roof drain leader with 1” Johns Manville Micro-Lok fiberglass pipe insulation. a. Provide with PVC Jacket within Utility Room. 3.13 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Piping, Exposed from finished floor to 12’ above finished floor: 1. PVC: 30 mils thick. END OF SECTION 220700 PLUMBING INSULATION2207000 - 10 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building. 2. Encasement for piping. 3. Specialty valves. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Water meters furnished by utility company for installation by Contractor. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Sleeves and sleeve seals. 8. Wall penetration systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following products: 1. Specialty valves. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Water meters. 6. Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers. 7. Escutcheons. 8. Sleeves and sleeve seals. 9. Water penetration systems. B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article. C. Coordination Drawings: For piping in equipment rooms and other congested areas, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved: 1. Domestic water piping. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping. C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: DOMESTIC WATER PIPING221116 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance written notice of proposed interruption of water service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Construction Manager's written permission. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type Lwater tube, drawn temper. 1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to- metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 4. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. 2) NIBCO INC. 3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems. b. NPS 2and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end. 5. Copper-Tube Extruded-Tee Connections: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) T-DRILL Industries Inc. b. Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type Kwater tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 2. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. 2) NIBCO INC. 3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems. b. NPS 2and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end. 2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING221116 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty metal valves. B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers. 2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 2. Flexicraft Industries. 3. Flex Pression, Ltd. 4. Flex-Weld, Inc. 5. Metraflex, Inc. 6. Unaflex, Inc. 7. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company B. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing. 1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig 2. End Connections NPS 2and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. 2.6 WATER METERS – Coordinate with local water authority in type of meter to be installed. A. Compound-Type Water Meters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Badger Meter, Inc. b. Mueller Company; Water Products Division. c. Sensus Metering Systems. 2. Description: a. Standard: AWWA C702. b. Pressure Rating: 150-psigworking pressure. c. Body Design: With integral mainline and bypass meters; totalization meter. d. Registration: In gallonsas required by utility company. e. Case: Bronze. f. Pipe Connections: Flanged. B. Remote Registration System: Direct-reading type complying with AWWA C706; modified with signal transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly if required by utility company. 2.7 PIPING SCHEDULE: Piping products listed above are acceptable products that may be substituted for the list below. A. Underground water piping: Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type Kwater tube, annealed temper. 1. Fittings to match piping a. Solder water tube fittings, cast brass or wrought copper, ASTM B-62 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING221116 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Aboveground water piping: Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type Lwater tube, drawn temper. 1. Fittings - Solder water tube fittings, cast brass or wrought copper, ANSI 16.18 or ANSI 16.22 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. D. Install underground copper tube and ductile-iron pipe in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers. F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. G. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing valves. H. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb. I. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements. J. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. K. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. L. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. M. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. N. Install piping to permit valve servicing. O. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. P. Install piping free of sags and bends. Q. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. R. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING221116 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa S. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers. T. All water branch copper piping is to have soldered fittings only. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter. E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." F. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. G. Ductile-Iron-Piping Grooved Joints: Cut groove end of pipe. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join ductile-iron pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe, cut- grooved joints. H. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations. 3.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION A. Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping. 3.6 WATER METER INSTALLATION A. Rough-in domestic water piping for water meter installation , and install water meter according to utility company's requirements. B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company. C. Install water meters according to AWWA M6, utility company's requirements, and the following: D. Install compound-type water meters with shutoff valves on water-meter inlet and outlet and on valved bypass around meter. Support meters, valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers. E. Install remote registration system according to standards of utility company and of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING221116 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes. 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation. B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Piping Inspections: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Piping Tests: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING221116 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 3.10 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 7. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 3.11 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3.12 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2and smaller. 3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves. B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment. END OF SECTION 22116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING221116 - 7 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties: 1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Water tempering valves. 3. Hose bibs. 4. Wall Hydrants. 5. Drain Valves. 6. Water hammer arresters. 7. Strainers. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components. 2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ames Co. b. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. c. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES221119 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 as required to match connected piping. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Chrome plated. B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. b. Woodford Manufacturing Company. c. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Standard: ASSE 1011. 3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. 5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated 2.2 WATER TEMPERING VALVES A. Water Tempering Valves (MV-A) 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Provide the product indicated on Drawing. 2.3 HOSE BIBBS A. Hose Bibbs (HB-1): 1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011. 8. Finish: Rough bronze. 9. Operation: Operating key. 10. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. 2.4 WALL HYDRANTS A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants (WH-1): 1. Refer to schedule on drawings. 2.5 DRAIN VALVES A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves: 1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS ¾. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES221119 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2.6 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. Water Hammer Arresters – (SA-size letter): 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. PPP Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Watts Drainage Products Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F. 2.7 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Y-Pattern Strainers 1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with AWWA C550 for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size: a. Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.033 inch 6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 22 Sections for piping joining materials, joint consruction and basic installation requirements. B. Install water control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. C. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet below fixture. D. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201. E. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor drain. 3.2 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Plumbing Identification." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES221119 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves. END OF SECTION 22119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES221119 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings. 3. Encasement for underground metal piping. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Sovent Drainage System: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. C. Field quality-control inspection and test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING221316 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 2.4 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade A or B, Standard Weight or Schedule 40, galvanized. Include ends matching joining method. B. Venting Fittings: ASME B16.12, galvanized, threaded, cast-iron drainage pattern. C. Pressure Fittings: 1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, galvanized, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method. 2. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 150; hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to- metal, bronze seating surface; and female threaded ends. 3. Gray-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, galvanized, standard pattern. 2.5 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings. 2.6 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid-Wall Sch. 40 PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. 2.7 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. c. Logan Clay Products Company (The). d. Mission Rubber Co. e. NDS, Inc. 2. Sleeve Materials: a. For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion- resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING221316 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa b. Mission Rubber Co. C. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve(s) with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. 1. Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. b. Romac Industries, Inc. c. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div. D. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections for up to 20- degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. 1. Manufacturers: a. SIGMA Corp. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. B. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. a. Option for Vent Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type M copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. 4. Cellular-core PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Cellular-core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. 2. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel and rigid, unshielded couplings; and hubless-coupling joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary Sewers." SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING221316 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers. D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." E. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. F. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. G. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. H. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. I. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. J. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing. K. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following: SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING221316 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods. E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 4. NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod. H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet. I. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. J. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. K. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING221316 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U- tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. END OF SECTION 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING221316 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Roof flashing assemblies. 4. Through-penetration firestop assemblies. 5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 6. Flashing materials. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals. B. Field quality-control test reports. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKWATER VALVES A. Drain-Outlet Backwater Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. c. Watts Drainage Products Inc. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES221319 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 3. Size: Same as floor drain outlet. 4. Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor drain. 5. Check Valve: Removable ball float. 6. Inlet: Threaded. 7. Outlet: Threaded or spigot. 8. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified to hang closed. 9. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to field-installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover. 2.2 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal. B. Metal Floor Cleanouts: 1. Refer to schedules on drawings. C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts: 1. Refer to schedules on drawings. 2.3 FLOOR DRAINS 1. Refer to schedules on drawings. 2.4 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES A. Roof Flashing Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div. b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch- thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting. 1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap. 2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap. 3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES221319 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2.5 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ProSet Systems Inc. 2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. 3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack. 4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug. 6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Deep-Seal Traps: 1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping. a. NPS 2: 4-inch- minimum water seal. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal. B. Stack Flashing Fittings: 1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. C. Vent Caps: 1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. D. Frost-Resistant Vent Terminals: 1. Description: Manufactured or shop-fabricated assembly constructed of copper, lead-coated copper, or galvanized steel. 2. Design: To provide 1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with counterflashing. 2.7 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft.. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft.. B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES221319 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa C. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. D. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. E. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy. F. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. a. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. 2. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 3. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. G. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. H. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor penetrations. I. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches above floor. J. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets. K. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. L. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. M. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate. N. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES221319 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa O. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate. P. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties. Q. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. R. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES221319 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 221343 - FACILITY PACKAGED SEWAGE PUMPING STATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes wet-well, packaged pumping stations with submersible grinder sewage pumps. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Pressure Rating of Sewage Pumps and Discharge Piping Components: At least equal to sewage pump discharge pressure, but not less than 125 psig. B. Pressure Rating of Other Piping Components: At least equal to system operating pressure. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for each packaged sewage pumping station. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions; shipping, installed, and operating weights; loads; required clearances; method of field assembly; components; electrical characteristics; and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Product Certificates: For each type of sewage pump, signed by product manufacturer. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Source quality-control test reports. F. Field quality-control test reports. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with HI 1.1-1.2, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature and Definitions"; HI 1.3, "Centrifugal Pumps for Design and Application"; and HI 1.4, "Centrifugal Pumps for Installation, Operation and Maintenance," for sewage pumps. D. Comply with UL 778, "Motor-Operated Water Pumps," for sewage pumps. FACILITY PACKAGED SEWAGE PUMPING STATIONS 221343 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged sewage pumping stations that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including shell. b. Faulty operation of sewage pumps, controls, or accessories. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period for Shells: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Sewage Pumps and Controls: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Accessories: 1 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Wet-Well, Packaged Sewage Pumping Stations with Submersible Grinder Sewage Pumps: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or approved equal from below: a. Environment One Corporation. b. Gorman-Rupp Company (The). c. Pentair Pump Group; F. E. Myers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in of sewerage piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before packaged sewage pumping station installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 EARTHWORK A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install packaged sewage pumping station components where indicated, according to specific equipment and piping arrangement indicated. B. Grout under and around shell. Ensure that there are no voids between foundation slab and underslab of pumping station. C. Fill voids between shell sidewalls, sleeves, and piping and make watertight seal with grout. FACILITY PACKAGED SEWAGE PUMPING STATIONS 221343 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Sanitary sewer piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary Sewers." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping. B. Install piping to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Install identifying labels permanently attached to equipment. B. Install operating instruction signs permanently attached to equipment or on pumping station wall near equipment. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.. Report results in writing. C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing packaged sewage pumping stations and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Furnish water required for pump tests. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Remove and replace packaged sewage pumping stations that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above. 3.7 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Adjust pump, accessory, and control settings, and safety and alarm devices. END OF SECTION 221343 FACILITY PACKAGED SEWAGE PUMPING STATIONS 221343 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping inside the building: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings. 3. Encasement for underground metal piping. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working-pressure, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings. B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra-Heavy classes. B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. a. Available Manufacturers: 1) ANACO. 2) Fernco, Inc. 3) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. C. Rigid, Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type, reducing- or transition-type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. ANACO. 2.5 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS A. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion- resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Mission Rubber Co. B. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve(s) with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. b. Romac Industries, Inc. c. Star Pipe Products; Star Fittings Div. C. Wall-Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections for up to 20- degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. SIGMA Corp. 2.6 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. B. Cellular-Core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Series PS 100. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Series PS 100 sewer and drain pipe. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be of the following: 1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and coupled joints. C. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6shall be any of the following: 1. Extra-heavy class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Storm sewer and drainage piping outside the building are specified in Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage Piping." B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers. Cleanouts are specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialities." D. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping. E. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Fire Plumbing." F. Install wall-penetration fitting system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. G. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. H. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. I. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Building Storm Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results Plumbing." B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. C. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints. 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods. E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in. FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. E. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. F. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. G. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. END OF SECTION 221413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following storm drainage piping specialties: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Roof drains. 3. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, cast-iron plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal. B. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. 221423 - 1 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, drilled-and-threaded cast-iron plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze wall-installation frame and cover. 2.2 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ProSet Systems Inc. 3. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. 4. Size: Same as connected pipe. 5. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 6. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug. 7. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings. 2.3 ROOF DRAINS A. Metal Roof Drains RD Combination Primary: 1. Refer to schedule on drawings. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Expansion Joints: 1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M. 2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland. 3. End Connections: Matching connected piping. 4. Size: Same as connected piping. 2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, 12 oz./sq. ft. thickness. B. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness. C. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. D. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic. 221423 - 2 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at base of each vertical stack. C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. D. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors at floor penetrations. E. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas as shown on the drawings and according to roof membrane manufacturer's written installation instructions. Roofing materials are specified in Division 07. 1. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so that there will be no leakage between drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 2. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance. F. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. G. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required: 1. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes. 221423 - 3 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 221423 221423 - 4 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 221511 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 6. Service meters. 7. Mechanical sleeve seals. 8. Grout. 9. Concrete bases. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 5 psig . B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Piping specialties. 2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models. 3. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 4. Service meters. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. Include meter bars and supports. 5. Dielectric fittings. 6. Mechanical sleeve seals. 7. Escutcheons. B. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved. C. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other services and utilities. D. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. E. Welding certificates. F. Field quality-control reports. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators and service meters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING221511 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight. D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact and coordinate with utility-locating service for area where Project is located. B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner’s Representative no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Owner's Representative written permission. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided with Local Utility gas company and Owner’s Representative. B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING221511 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel underground. 5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE. a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves. 6. Mechanical Couplings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc. 2) Smith-Blair, Inc. b. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. e. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. f. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory equipped with anode. B. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11. 1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type with dimensions matching PE pipe. 2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested. a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet. b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black steel, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating covering. c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting. d. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe. 4. Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested. a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet connected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet. b. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. c. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling. d. Factory-connected anode. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe. 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Strainer Screen: 40 mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING221511 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. B. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services. B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig . 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body. C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig . 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. d. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. E. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING221511 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. c. Milliken Valve Company. d. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. 2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. 2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller.. B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. d. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig. C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div. b. Harper Wyman Co. c. Maxitrol Company. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING221511 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 1 psig. 2.6 SERVICE METERS A. Rotary-Type Service Meters: Comply with ANSI B109.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or comparable product by one of the following: a. American Meter Company. b. Invensys. c. Neptune d. Badger 3. Case: Extruded aluminum. 4. Connection: Flange. 5. Impellers: Polished aluminum. 6. Rotor Bearings: Self-lubricating. 7. Compensation: Continuous temperature and pressure. 8. Meter Index: Cubic feet. 9. Tamper resistant. 10. Remote meter reader compatible. 11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig 12. Accuracy: Maximum plus or minus 2.0 percent. B. Service-Meter Bars: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. f. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. 2. Malleable- or cast-iron frame for supporting service meter. 3. Include offset swivel pipes, meter nuts with o-ring seal, and factory- or field-installed dielectric unions. 4. Omit meter offset swivel pipes if service-meter bar dimensions match service-meter connections. C. Service-Meter Bypass Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. b. Williamson, T. D., Inc. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING221511 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2. Ferrous, tee, pipe fitting with capped side inlet for temporary natural-gas supply. 3. Integral ball-check bypass valve. 2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. c. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group. 2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials. B. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group. 2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig . 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint, plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials. 2.8 SLEEVES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. 2.9 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe and sleeve. 3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING221511 - 7 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one nut and bolt for each sealing element. 2.10 ESCUTCHEONS A. General Requirements for Escutcheons: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with ID to fit around pipe or tube, and OD that completely covers opening. B. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: With set screw. 1. Finish: Rough brass. C. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Rough brass.]. D. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Escutcheons: Cast-iron floor plate. 2.11 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. 2.12 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section. B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected. C. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition. 3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in containment conduit. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING221511 - 8 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa C. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774. D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating: 1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe. E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. G. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. H. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. I. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. G. Locate valves for easy access. H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps. I. Install piping free of sags and bends. J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. K. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING221511 - 9 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa M. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements. N. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap. O. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. P. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. 1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit. 2. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports. a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker barriers. 3. Prohibited Locations: a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions. Q. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. R. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. S. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections. T. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode. U. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve. V. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 3.5 SERVICE-METER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION A. Install service-meter assemblies aboveground, on concrete bases or as specified by the local utility gas company. B. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service regulators. Shutoff valves are not required at second regulators if two regulators are installed in series. C. Install strainer on inlet of service-pressure regulator and meter set. D. Install service regulators mounted outside with vent outlet horizontal or facing down. Install screen in vent outlet if not integral with service regulator. E. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service meters. Install dielectric fittings downstream from service meters. F. Install service meters downstream from pressure regulators. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING221511 - 10 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install underground valves with valve boxes. B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing. C. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping. 3.7 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. D. Welded Joints: 1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators. 2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction. E. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned. 3.8 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 3.9 CONNECTIONS A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements. B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70. C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances. D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING221511 - 11 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance. 3.10 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification. B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.11 PAINTING A. Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping. B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating. 1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel semigloss. d. Color: 1) On roof: Gray. 2) On exterior wall to roof: Color to match exterior wall color. C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating. 1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q. a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex low sheen. d. Color: Gray. D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish. 3.12 CONCRETE BASES 1. Concrete Bases: Coordinate with local utility gas company. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to The International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction. C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING221511 - 12 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 3.14 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE A. Underground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following: 1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line risers with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping. B. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. 3.15 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. C. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping. 3.16 UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE A. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's gas mains and listed by an NRTL. B. Underground: 1. PE valves. 2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze plug valves. 3.17 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve. B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following: 1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. END OF SECTION 221511 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING221511 - 13 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING221511 - 14 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following electric water heaters: 1. Small-capacity electric water heaters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Product Certificates: For each type of electric water heater, signed by product manufacturer. D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASME Compliance: Where indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for all components that will be in contact with potable water. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SMALL CAPACITY ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Refer to schedule on drawings.. 2.2 COMPRESSION TANKS A. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank. 1. Manufacturers: a. AMTROL Inc. b. Smith, A. O.; Aqua-Air Div. c. Watts Regulator Co. 2. Construction: ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread. b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed. 3. Capacity and Characteristics: a. Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig . b. Capacity Acceptable: 2 gal. minimum. 2.3 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank. B. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3. Include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. C. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4. D. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. B. Prepare test reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible. B. Extend water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain. C. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for hose-end drain valves. D. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping of electric water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers. E. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps. F. Fill water heaters with water. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for easy removal of water heaters. C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 223300 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components: 1. Faucets for sinks. 2. Fixture supports. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities" for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures. E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. Stainless-Steel Sink: NSF 2 construction. G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for sink faucets: 1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. 3. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 4. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. PLUMBING FIXTURES224000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 5. Integral, Atmospheric. Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 6. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 7. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430. 2. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. 3. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3. 4. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 5. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed. 2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINKS A. Refer to schedule on drawings. 2.2 WATER CLOSETS A. Refer to schedule on drawings. 2.3 URINALS A. Refer to schedule on drawings. 2.4 LAVATORIES A. Refer to schedule on drawings. 2.5 MOP BASIN A. Refer to schedule on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation. B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions. B. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. PLUMBING FIXTURES224000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa C. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. 1. Exception: Use ball valve if supply stops are not specified with fixture. D. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. E. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves. F. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated. G. Install escutcheons at piping wall, floor penetrations in exposed. H. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. 3.4 FIXTURE SUPPORT A. Furnish and install hangers, supports, carriers, etc., for proper installation of fixtures and equipment. Supports shall be in accordance with recommendations of fixture manufacturer, and if built into partitions or walls, shall be set as wall construction progresses. Use concealed arm carrier only for lavatories, brackets will not be acceptable. This contractor shall be responsible for the stability of fixtures and shall provide all items to guarantee same. B. Fixtures and equipment shall be mounted level, secure, rigid an flush with wall or floor as applicable. C. Drill holes carefully to avoid chipping block or tile. D. Supports shall be concealed unless otherwise noted. E. Carriers, where required, shall be adequately secured to floor or wall structural members sufficient to withstand a downward force of 250 lb. on any surface of the fixture being supported. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls. B. Operate and adjust disposers and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and controls. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow and stream. PLUMBING FIXTURES224000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following: 1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts. 2. Remove sediment and debris from drains. B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. A. Install all fixtures, trim etc. in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. B. Fixtures shall be free from imperfections, true as to line, angles, curves and color, smooth, watertight, and com- plete in every respect. C. Guarantee proper selection and coordination of fittings and parts relating to each fixture. D. Water supplies to fixtures shall be valved at each fixture. E. Fixtures shall be left thoroughly clean and free from marks and foreign substances. F. Repair leaky faucets and valves prior to final inspection. G. Install seal in flange for water closets, set closet in approved, white, non-staining compound around perimeter of base to prevent deterioration of bolts, and wall or floor. H. Fixtures shall be properly installed and securely supported, in accordance with manufacturers instructions. All fix- ture carrier fastening shall be given final tightening adjustments prior to concealment by wall surfaces. Holes for through bolts shall be carefully drilled to avoid cosmetic and structural damage to general construction. I. Protect all fixtures from damage after installation prior to acceptance by owner. At the completion of the work, remove all labels, thoroughly clean and place fixture into working order. J. Fixtures indicated as handicapped are to be installed in accordance with the requirements of the American Na- tional Standards Institute code ANSI 117.1, ”Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Useable by Physically Handicapped People". Such requirements include mounting heights and insulation of ex- posed drains and hot water piping. K. Seal all joints formed where fixtures come in contact with walls and floors. END OF SECTION 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES224000 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 224700 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following drinking fountains and related components: 1. Drinking fountains. 2. Fixture supports. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each fixture indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act" ; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act" ; for fixtures for people with disabilities. B. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DRINKING FOUNTAINS A. Drinking Fountains: 1. Refer to schedule on drawings. 2.2 FIXTURE SUPPORTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Josam Co. 2. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 3. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. 4. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc. 5. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. B. Description: ASME A112.6.1M, water cooler carriers. Include vertical, steel uprights with feet and tie rods and in- wall bearing plates with mounting studs matching fixture to be supported. 1. Type II: Bilevel, hanger-type carrier with two minimum vertical uprights. 2. Supports for Accessible Fixtures: Include rectangular, vertical, steel uprights instead of steel pipe uprights. DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 224700 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types of supports match those indicated. B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Use carrier off-floor supports for wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and in-wall mounting plates. Attach wall-mounting fixtures to the in-wall mounting plates, unless otherwise indicated. B. Install fixtures level and plumb. C. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Use ball valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." D. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system. E. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." F. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Drinking Fountain Testing: Test for compliance with requirements. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 1. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 2. Report test results in writing. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height. 3.7 CLEANING A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 224700 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa END OF SECTION 224700 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 224700 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Sleeves. 3. Escutcheons. 4. Grout. 5. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 6. HVAC demolition. 7. Supports and anchorages. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-- Steel." B. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINING MATERIALS A. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 2.2 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2.3 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HVAC DEMOLITION A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. B. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. 3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. 3.6 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: 1.15. D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. H. Insulation: Class F. I. Code Letter Designation: COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Motors 15HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters. 2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent-split capacitor. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Vinyl Equipment Labels: 1. Provide 4” black vinyl lettering. 2. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. END OF SECTION 230533 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following: 1. Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. 2. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings. 3. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 4. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project. B. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm. C. Warranties specified in this Section. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB. B. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from SMACNA's TABB "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities. B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. 1.6 WARRANTY A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. 1. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. C. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. D. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed. E. Examine system and equipment test reports. F. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. G. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing. H. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. I. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. J. Examine plenum ceilings used for return air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed. K. Examine heat-transfer coils for clean and straight fins. L. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. M. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals. 4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. 5. Thermostats, humidistats and CO2 sensors are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values. N. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports.Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.. 2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in SMACNA's TABB "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters. 3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes. 6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS A. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Airflow. 3. Air pressure drop. 4. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system. B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures. 3.9 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers). E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems. I. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or non-grounded power supply. J. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3.11 FINAL REPORT A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following: 1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. END OF SECTION 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Mineral fiber. 2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Sealants. 6. Factory-applied jackets. 7. Tapes. 8. Securements. 9. Corner angles. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 3. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. 4. Detail application at linkages of control devices. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa C. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap. D. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. c. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 2.3 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II. B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. 1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 4. Color: White. 2.4 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 2.5 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. 8. Width: 2 inches. 9. Thickness: 6 mils. 10. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 11. Elongation: 500 percent. 12. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width. C. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. D. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel. 2.6 CORNER ANGLES A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.3 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. 3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward- clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward- clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.5 FINISHES A. Duct and Equipment Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size. HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.7 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Indoor, concealed supply, return, outdoor/ventilation and exhaust air. 2. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 3. Indoor, exposed intake and exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Vibration-control devices. 6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors. 3.8 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Concealed, Supply and Return Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 1- lb/cu. ft. nominal density. B. Concealed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 1-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. C. Exposed, Outdoor/Ventilation and Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber board, 1-1/2 inches thick and 3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. END OF SECTION 230700 HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 7 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. An energy management system is being provided by the Owner under a separate contract. The hardware is being provided by Computer Process Controls (CPC) located in Kennesaw, GA. Telephone (770) 425-2724. The EMS shall be installed by the Refrigeration Contractor and the Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate scope of work and scheduling with the Aldi Project Mananger and Refrigeration Contractor. B. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls. C. See Division 23 Section "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that relate to this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. B. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." C. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures. D. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." E. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts. END OF SECTION 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 230993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The HVAC automatic control system shall be provided and installed by CPC Energy Management Systems and shall consist of individual controllers for each unit. All control requirements shall be coordinated with the CPC En- ergy Management Systems and the installing contractor before ordering equipment . PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOSTATS, SENSORS, & CONTROLLERS A. All HVAC controls by CPC Energy Management System. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXHAUST FAN CONTROLS A. Toilet/utility exhaust fan (EF-3) and backroom exhaust fan (EF-2) shall be controlled by CPC building management system. The exhaust fans shall be on the same occupancy schedule as the Sales Floor lighting. The exhaust fans shall run during “occupied” mode and shall be off in “unoccupied” mode. B. Break room exhaust fan (EF-1) shall be controlled with a manual wall switch. 3.2 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS A. Room Temperature: DDC temperature sensor cycles unit heater on and off to maintain room temperature setpoint. 3.3 ROOFTOP UNIT SEQUENCE OF OPERATION (CES RTU-1) A. MODES OF OPERATION (SCHEDULE) Time Schedules There are two modes of occupancy which follow the : OCCUPIED and UNOCCUPIED. active OCCUPIED defines those hours that the supermarket is (day), and UNOCCUPIED defines those hours that the inactive supermarket is (night). The Time Schedule is set upon store commissioning. The setpoint file arrives with the Aldi default Time Schedule. B. FAN STRATEGY The Aldi-CES Dual-Path Unit is supplied with a variable frequency drive (VFD). The fan operates based upon a two- speed demand; thus, the strategy imitates a two-speed fan design. The difference is that the fan motor continually coasts; therefore, the motor is never stopped. Throughout the OCCUPIED mode of operation. the fan runs at its 100% setting. The setting is defined as the VFD hertz setting that is inputted at unit start-up and/or air balancing. Throughout UNOCCUPIED mode, the fan motor ramps down (coasts to) 50% of its 100% setting. The maximum possible setting for the fan motor is 100%, and its minimum position setting is 34%. UNOCCUPIED FAN STRATEGY Throughout UNOCCUPIED mode, the fan motor coasts at 50% of its maximum setting. The fan motor will immediately ramp to 100% if: 1. A heat reclaim demand exists, 2. A heat demand exists (either electric or natural gas), and more than 3. A dehumidification demand has existed for 30 minutes. SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa AIRFLOW STRATEGY (TIED TO EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN) There are two airflow switches installed in every Aldi-CES Dual-Path Unit: 1. Digital Airflow Switch (dry contact), and 2. Mechanical Airflow Switch (verified and set at start-up). If the CPC controller demands for the fan, it verifies the response by closure of the digital airflow switch. If the fan de- mand exists and there is no response from the fan, the CPC application will attempt to start the fan 10 times. After 10 failed attempts, the CPC application will lock the program and alarm a "fail fan." The fan failing is tied into the EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN. C. SYSTEM ENABLE (DRY CONTACT) Contact closure of the system enable allows the CPC application to function. Without this closure, which is connected across the designated CPC analog input, the CES application will not run. If this contact is open, there will be no re- sponse from the CPC application; therefore, there will be no demand for the CES Dual-Path Unit. D. REMOTE SMOKE DETECTOR (DRY CONTACT) Contact closure of the remote smoke detector, located in the ventilation duct, allows the CPC application to function. The contact of this closure is considered crucial, and it is inputted as an EMERGENCY CES UNIT SHUTDOWN. Upon this contact opening, the unit will shut down within 15 seconds. The unit will remain in idle until the contact closes. The CPC application will alarm on "emergency shutdown." If this contact is open, the CPC application can produce no de- mand for the CES Dual-Path Unit. E. GLOBAL DATA: HVAC EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN (INTERNAL) Global inputted data of the controller. If problem occurs, the CES Dual-Path Unit will shut down and alarm "emergency shutdown." F. CLOGGED FILTER SWITCH (DRY CONTACT) The clogged filter switch is set at start-up of the CES Dual-Path Unit. Upon closure of this contact, the CPC application will alarm "dirty filter." G. DAMPER STRATEGY & CONTROL Due to the Dual-Path design, there are three independent dampers: 1. OAD (outdoor air), 2. RAD (return air), and 3. BAD (bypass air). The OAD has the following strategies: Time Schedule change from UNOCCUPIED to OCCUPIED induces a slow open damper. The damper opens in 1/8% increments to full 100% positioning over a 40 minute period. Occupied OAD opening with no demand: 23% Occupied OAD opening with dehumidification demand: 20% Occupied OAD opening with heating demand: 23% Occupied OAD opening with CO2 demand: 38% (15% increment increase) Unoccupied OAD opening: 0% SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa Unoccupied OAD opening with CO2 demand: 15% The RAD has the following strategies: Occupied RAD opening with no demand: 80% Occupied RAD opening with dehumidification demand: 60% Occupied RAD opening with heating demand: 80% Occupied RAD opening with CO2 demand: either 80% or 60% (depends on current demand) Unoccupied RAD opening: 80% Unoccupied RAD opening with CO2 demand: 80% The BAD has the following strategies: Dehumidification demand: 100% Cooling demand: 0% CO2 STRATEGY (TIED TO OAD) Target: 750 PPM CO2 > 750 PPM = Increase OAD increment by 15% H. RERIGERATION CONTROL (ENHANCED SUCTION GROUP) Compressor 1 = Copeland Digital Scroll, 15% - 100% Modulation Capacity (1-5VDC) Compressor 2 = Copeland Scroll, On/Off (24VAC) Control Strategy: Tightest & variation of on/off control based upon demand/set point DEHUMIDIFICATION Enable based upon space dew point DEHUMIDIFICATION ACTIVE (OCCUPIED) Space dew point > 48.8˚F + algorithm rate of change = DEHUMIDIFICATION ACTIVE (UNOCCUPIED) Space dew point > 49.5˚F + algorithm rate of change = Desired maintenance set point = 50.2˚F set When the dehumidification is made active, the suction pressure set point is via the space dew point. This implies that the suction pressure set point floats continually based upon the actual space dew point. This controls the DX Coil SHR colder (sensible heat ratio), as a dew point further from the desired maintenance set point will yield a coil; similarly, a warmer space dew point nearer to the desired maintenance set point will yield a coil. This is linear and produces the op- erating envelope of the compressor in question when in relation to the desired maintenance set point. When space dew point is at 48.2˚F, the suction pressure set point is 117 PSIG. 117 PSIG = 39˚F SST furthest from Therefore, the saturated suction temperature is 39˚F when the space dew point is the desired maintenance set point. When space dew point is at 50.2˚F, the suction pressure set point is 108 PSIG. 108 PSIG = 35˚F SST closest to Therefore, the saturated suction temperature is 35˚F when the space dew point is the desired maintenance set point. I. COOLING Enable based upon space temperature COOL ACTIVE (OCCUPIED) Space temperature > 74˚F + algorithm rate of change = COOL ACTIVE (UNOCCUPIED) Space temperature > 75˚F + algorithm rate of change = It is important to note that the dehumidification demand takes priority. The cooling strategy is based upon the space temperature. As the space temperature rises above set point, the digital compressor ramps up. Once the PID loop has reached 50%, the on/off scroll is enabled. The PID loop, which is based upon actual space temperature, controls both compressors. The greater the difference from space set point will yield a SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa greater compressor capacity enabled; likewise, the lesser the difference from space set point will yield less compressor capacity enabled to provide space cooling. REFRIGERATION SAFETIES All typical safeties are applicable to all Aldi-CES Dual-Path Units: low suction pressure cut-out at 60PSIG, high suction pressure cut-out at 200PSIG throughout dehumidification, high discharge pressure cut-out at 600PSIG, pressure control cut-out if the suction pressure drops below 104 PSIG throughout cooling, pressure control cut-out if the suction pressure drops below 80 PSIG throughout dehumidification, phase loss cut-out, anti-short cycling timer, etc. J. REHEAT OR HEAT RECLAIM COIL CONTROL REHEAT COIL (ENABLES 3-WAY VALVE IN CES UNIT) The reheat coil can only be enabled throughout dehumidification. It is a separate sensor control which looks solely at space temperature. Space temperature < 72.8˚F = Enable the reheat coil Space temperature > = 73.8˚F = Disable the reheat coil These set points can be changed to accommodate the desired space temperature control. HEAT RECLAIM COIL (ENABLES 3-WAY VALVE LOCATED AT THE PACK) The heat reclaim coil is used to reheat the supply airstream throughout dehumidification, and it is used as the first stage of heat throughout the heating season. It is a separate sensor control which looks solely at space temperature. Space temperature < 71.8˚F = Enable the reheat coil Space temperature > = 73.5˚F = Disable the reheat coil These set points can be changed to accommodate the desired space temperature control. K HEATING Heating is based solely upon space temperature. (OCCUPIED) Space temperature < 68˚F = Enable heat (either natural gas or electric) (UNOCCUPIED) Space temperature < 60˚F = Enable heat (either natural gas or electric) These set points can be changed to accommodate the desired space temperature control. There are four stages of heating for all Aldi-CES Dual-Path Units. Each stage controls a specific capacity. The staging is based upon supply air temperature. The supply air temperature is either 96˚F (southern climates) or 106˚F (northern climates). This set point can be changed to accommodate the store design (location of the supply air temperature sen- sor, duct run, etc.) HEATING SAFETIES All typical heating safeties are applicable to all Aldi-CES Dual-Path Units: high limit switches, roll back switches, pres- sure differential switches, etc. L PHASE LOSS CONTROL All Aldi-CES Dual-Path Units are equipped with a phase and brown-out protector. Upon detection of a phase problem, the protector opens the secondary 24VAC circuit. This disables the control circuit of the CES Dual-Path Unit. M VFD SAFETY CIRCUIT All Aldi-CES Dual-Path Units will be circuited as described: 1. If the line phasing and voltage are correct, the PBO relay will close. This allows the 24VAC to pass to the drive contact MC. It is important to note that the Transformer Relay (TR) is not energized at this point; therefore, the circuit is complete between the drive contacts SC (common) & S3. This indicates to the drive that there is an ex- not enable ternal mechanical error, as the circuit is complete between S3 & SC. The drive is programmed to “ when in RE command ” if the circuit is complete between SC & S3. 2. If the drive does not detect an error or fault, it closes the contact between MC& MB. The error/fault verification by the drive is completed internally, and it is unrelated to the contact status between SC & S3 and SC & S1. This contact closure completes the 24VAC circuit to the TR; consequently, TR becomes energized. When TR is ener- gized, the normally closed (NC) contact opens. This opens the circuit between SC & S3, so the drive clears its fault that there is an external mechanical error. The drives awaits directive from the Emerson controller. 3. Relay Output # 1 (RO1) of the Emerson Multiflex board closes, and Relay 1 (R1) is energized and closes (the normally open contact changes state). When R1 closes, the circuit between drive contacts SC (common) & S1 is complete. This signifies to the drive that the fan can be enabled. SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 4. Analog Output # 3 (AO3) of the Emerson Multiflex board provides the VDC signal to control the fan speed. In the Emerson program, the fan is at 100%, which is 10VDC, throughout occupied mode or at 50%, which is 5VDC, throughout unoccupied mode. The fan speed does not modulate for any reason. 100% fan speed is determined by setting the frequency of the drive. This is determined at the factory, but the frequency can be adjusted to either reduce or increase fan speed. 3.4 ROOFTOP UNIT SEQUENCE OF OPERATION (RTU-2) A. Start and Stop Supply Fan: 1. Initiate: Occupied Time Schedule: a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule. b. Output Device: Binary output to RTU control interface. c. Action: Energize supply fan, open outside air damper to minimum position as scheduled and monitor status. 2. Initiate: Unoccupied Time Schedule: a. Input Device: DDC system demand. b. Output Device: Binary output to RTU control interface. c. Action: Energize fan supply fan on a call for heating or cooling in night setback. Outside air damper shall remain closed. 3. Space temperature control: The space sensor which serves the RTU shall control heating & cooling operation of the RTU. On space temperature above the cooling setpoint the RTU’s cooling system shall be enabled. If the space temperature is below the heating setpoint the RTU’s packaged controller shall enable heat stages as required. Both the heating and cooling setpoints shall have a minimum 2 Deg F deadband. 4. Ventilation: RTU supply fan shall run continuously during the Occupied mode to provide adequate ventilation of the space. When enabled the RTU shall modulate its outdoor air intake damper to the minimum position. 3.5 FIRE AND SMOKE SAFETY CONTROL A. Unit supply air fan shall be shut down by fire and smoke safety controls according to applicable codes. B. Firestats shall be installed in the return air duct to each RTU according to local code and shall be interlock wired with building alarm system and RTU fan contactor. If return air temperature exceeds firestat setpoint, the associated RTU fan shall be stopped and a signal sent to the building alarm system. Alarm system wiring shall be by others under Division 16. C. Provide smoke detectors for all new RTUs according to local code, NFPA 90A and NFPA 72E. Smoke detectors shall be installed ahead (upstream) of first branch duct in supply duct and downstream of all branch ducts in return air duct. Each detector shall be provided with audiovisual device according to referenced codes. D. Air duct smoke detector shall be system sensor Model DH100ACDCI series 4 wire, 120 V. Housing shall be UL listed per UL268A. Provide remote test station with key, RTS451KEY and remote annuciator, RA400Z. Mechanical contractor shall verify compatibility with fire alarm system being installed. E. Complete sequence of operation and program functions shall be submitted by the Contractor with the consultation of the HVAC equipment manufacturer for Owner’s maintenance files. Copy of manufacturer's typical catalog draw- ings and specifications alone will not be acceptable. END OF SECTION 230993 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1. Static-Pressure Classes: a. Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg. b. Supply Ducts (Upstream from Air Terminal Units): 2-inch wg. c. Supply Ducts (Downstream from Air Terminal Units): 2-inch wg. d. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg. e. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg. 2. Leakage Class: SMACNA Seal Class - A a. Round Supply-Air Duct: 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg b. Rectangular Supply-Air Duct: 6 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg. c. Flexible Supply-Air Duct: 6 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa C. Delegated-Design Submittal: 1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. D. Welding certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged. C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for static-pressure class, METAL DUCTS 233113 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static- pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air- handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. 3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING A. Seal duct seams and joints for duct static-pressure and leakage classes specified in "Performance Requirements" Article, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 1-2, "Standard Duct Sealing Requirements," unless otherwise indicated. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Seal Classes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 1-2, "Standard Duct Sealing Requirements." 3.3 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.4 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel. B. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. C. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3- 3, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. b. Round Elbows, 12i Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam. D. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral. END OF SECTION 233113 METAL DUCTS 233113 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Control dampers. 3. Fire dampers. 4. Turning vanes. 5. Duct-mounted access doors. 6. Flexible ducts. 7. Flexible connectors 8. Duct accessory hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control damper installations. d. Fire-damper and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors. e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. METALAIRE, Inc. d. Ruskin Company. 2. Standard leakage rating. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: a. Oil-impregnated bronze. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. B. Jackshaft: 1. Size: 1-inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly. C. Damper Hardware: 1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.3 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. METALAIRE, Inc. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 5. Ruskin Company. B. Frames: 1. U shaped. 2. Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick. 3. Mitered and welded corners. C. Blades: 1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches. 2. Parrallel-blade design. 3. Galvanized steel. 4. 0.064 inch thick. 5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene edging. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals. D. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. 1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. E. Bearings: 1. Oil-impregnated bronze. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2.4 FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. Ruskin Company. B. Type: static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL. C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity. D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours. E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application. 2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements. G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated. H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors. I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 212 deg F rated, fusible links. 2.5 TURNING VANES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. METALAIRE, Inc. 3. SEMCO Incorporated. B. Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous- glass fill. C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." E. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions. 2.6 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct." 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 2.7 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements; available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Flame Gard, Inc. 3. 3M. B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL. C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel. D. Fasteners: Stainless steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall. E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F. F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative. 2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F. C. Flexible Duct Connectors: 1. Clamps: Nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. 2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4- inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized- steel. C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. H. Install fire dampers according to UL listing. I. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, and equipment. 2. Adjacent to and close enough to fire, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors; and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. 3. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 4. Upstream of turning vanes. 5. Elsewhere as indicated. J. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. K. Access Door Sizes: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. L. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. M. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly. N. Connect diffusers to low-pressure ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa O. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with nylon straps. P. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. END OF SECTION 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 7 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Centrifugal roof ventilators. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following: B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. C. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Greenheck. 2. Loren Cook Company. 3. Penn Ventilation. B. Description: Direct-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories. C. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades. E. Accessories: 1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops. 4. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with 24-volt electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops. HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa F. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 1. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange. 2. Overall Height: 14 inches. 3. Sound Curb: Curb with sound-absorbing insulation matrix. 4. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel. 2.2 MOTORS A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs. B. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. C. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." D. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." E. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. END OF SECTION 233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. 2. Six-Way supply diffuser. 3. Perforated face diffusers. 4. Adjustable bar registers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS – See Schedule Sheet on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 235533 - FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Aldi has a national account with Lennox industries. All Lennox HVAC equipment should be quoted and ordered through Lennox National Accounts. Please call 800-367-6285 and hit "2" for sales and ask for the Aldi National Account Sales Administrator who will assist you with quotes, availability and orders. B. This Section includes gas-fired unit heaters. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of fuel-fired unit heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power wiring. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace heat exchanger of fuel-fired unit heater that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Heat Exchanger Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Lennox Industries, Inc. B. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired, and complying with ANSI Z83.8/CSA 2.6. C. Fuel Type: Design burner for natural gas having characteristics same as those of gas available at Project site. D. Type of Venting: Power vented. E. Housing: Steel, with integral draft hood and inserts for suspension mounting rods. F. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel. G. Burner Material: Aluminized steel with stainless-steel inserts. FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 235533 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa H. Unit Fan: Propeller blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub, dynamically balanced, and resiliently mounted. I. Controls: Regulated redundant gas valve containing pilot solenoid valve, electric gas valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff all in one body. 1. Gas Control Valve: Single stage. 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor. 3. Vent Flow Verification: [Differential pressure switch to verify open vent. 4. Control transformer. 5. High Limit: Thermal switch or fuse to stop burner. J. Discharge Louvers: Independently adjustable horizontal blades. K. Accessories: 1. Four-point suspension kit. L. Capacities and Characteristics: See schedule sheet H-301. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install and connect gas-fired unit heaters and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54 and CAN/CSA B149.1, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using threaded rods, spring hangers, and building attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is level and plumb. C. Install piping adjacent to fuel-fired unit heater to allow service and maintenance. D. Gas Piping: Comply with Division 23 Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to gas train inlet; provide union with enough clearance for burner removal and service. E. Vent Connections: Comply with Division 23 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks." F. Electrical Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections. 1. Install electrical devices furnished with heaters but not specified to be factory mounted. G. Adjust initial temperature set points. H. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. END OF SECTION 235533 FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 235533 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Aldi has a national account with Lennox industries. All Lennox HVAC equipment should be quoted and ordered through Lennox National Accounts. Please call 800-367-6285 and hit "2" for sales and ask for the Aldi National Account Sales Administrator who will assist you with quotes, availability and orders. B. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop units) with the following components and accessories: 1. Direct-expansion cooling. 2. Gas furnace. 3. Integral, space temperature controls. 4. Roof curbs. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and maintenance data. D. Warranty. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ARI Compliance: 1. Comply with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs. B. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigerant system safety. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 3. Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 for minimum efficiency of heating and cooling. C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2. Warranty Period for Gas Furnace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 1 years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Lennox Industries Inc. 2.2 CASING A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed. B. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs. C. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I. 2. Thickness: 1 inch 3. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric. 4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. 2.3 FANS A. Belt-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls. B. Condenser-Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor. C. Fan Motor: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 2.4 COILS A. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor. 2. Coil Split: Interlaced. 3. Condensate Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant coating formed with pitch and drain connections complying with ASHRAE 62. 2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS A. Number of Refrigerant Circuits: One (RTU-2). B. Compressor: Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature , protection, internal pressure reliefand crankcase heater. C. Refrigeration Specialties: PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A 2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 3. Refrigerant filter/dryer. 4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch. 5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch. 6. Minimum off-time relay. 7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload. 8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines. 9. Hot gas reheat solenoid valve. 2.6 AIR FILTRATION A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Pleated: Minimum 90 percent arrestance, and MERV 7. 2.7 GAS FURNACE A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47 and NFPA 54. 1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA. B. Burners: Stainless steel with a minimum thermal efficiency of 80 percent. 1. Fuel: Natural gas. 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot-surface igniter with flame sensor. 3. High-Altitude Kit: For Project elevations more than 2000 feet above sea level. C. Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel. D. Power Vent: Integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve with vertical extension. E. Safety Controls: 1. Gas Control Valve: Two stage. 2. Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff. 2.8 DAMPERS A. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously. 1. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated with bird screen and hood. 2.9 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION A. Provide for single connection of power to unit. 2.10 CONTROLS A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." 2.11 ACCESSORIES A. Electric heater with integral thermostat maintains minimum 50 deg F temperature in gas burner compartment. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing (where required). C. Provide ¾” burglar bars on the supply and return openings. 2.12 ROOF CURBS A. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory-installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards. 1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II. b. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb. a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet. c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a temperature- resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity. B. Curb Height: 14 inches. 2.13 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS (See schedule sheet H-301.) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to ARI Guideline B. Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts. B. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain. C. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance. 1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service. D. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb. 3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." 4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Report results in writing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters. END OF SECTION 237413 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237413 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 237414 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, DEHUMIDIFICATION UNIT (RTU-1) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. RTU-1 is provided by the Owner, received, rigged and installed by the Mechanical Contractor. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. D. Operation and maintenance data. E. Warranty. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ARI Compliance: 1. Comply with ARI 210/240 and ARI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs. B. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigerant system safety. 2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 3. Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 for minimum efficiency of heating and cooling. C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Gas Furnace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 1 years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturer Consolidated Energy Solutions Inc. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 237414 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa Sahara Express™ CES Dual-Path Dehumidification RTU Contact: Rick Wilson (P) 888-598-1198 rickwilson@cesinc.ca 2.02 General Description Sahara Express™ A. Dual-Path Dehumidification RTU : self-contained - factory assembled and tested; de- signed for roof or slab installation; and consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, conden- ser and evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, gas heaters, filters, and dampers. Out- door air handling unit shall include filters, supply blowers, DX coils, gas heaters, and unit controls. B. Unit shall be factory assembled and tested including helium leak testing of the coils, pressure testing of the refrigeration circuit, and run testing of the completed unit. Run test report shall be supplied with the unit in the controls compartment’s literature pocket. C. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate lifting and rigging, service areas, and caution areas for safety and to assist service personnel. D. Unit components shall be labeled, including pipe stub outs, refrigeration system components, and electri- cal and controls components. E. Estimated sound power levels (dB) shall be shown on the unit ratings sheet. F. Installation, Operation, and Maintenance manual shall be supplied within the unit. G. Laminated color-coded wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and be provided in both point-to- point and ladder form and affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s hinged access door. H. Unit nameplate shall be provided in two locations on the unit, affixed to the exterior of the unit and affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s hinged access door. 2.03 Construction A. All cabinet walls, access doors and roof shall be fabricated of rigid, impact resistant, double wall, high per- formance composite panels with G90 galvanized steel on both sides and a closed cell polyurethane foam interior core. B. Foam shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds/cubic foot and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D-1929 for a minimum flash ignition temperature of 610°F. C. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, maximum 8 inches of posi- tive or negative static pressure. Deflection shall be measured at the midpoint of the panel height and width. D. Cabinet leakage rate shall not exceed 1% when tested at 6 inches of static pressure. E. Insulation shall have an R-value of 13. F. All cabinet walls, access doors and roof shall have a thermal break with no metal path to inside to outside. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 237414 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa G. Units with cooling coils shall include double sloped 304 stainless steel drain pans and a factory provided p- trap, for field installation. H. Roof of the air tunnel shall be sloped to provide complete drainage. I. Unit shall have rain break overhangs above access doors. J. Exterior paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2500 hours, with no visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure. K. Access to filters, dampers, economizers, cooling coils, power exhaust and return blowers, controls, com- pressors, and heaters shall be through hinged access doors with quarter turn, zinc cast, lockable handles. Full length stainless steel piano hinges shall be included on the doors. L. All openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least 0.5 inches in height around the opening through the base pan. M. Unit shall include lifting lugs on the top of the unit. N. Unit shall include interior corrosion protection which shall be capable of withstanding at least 2500 hours, with no visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure. Air tunnel, blowers, dampers, and economizer shall all include the corrosion pro- tection. 2.04 Electrical 1. Unit shall be provided with factory installed and factory wired, non-fused disconnect switch in the unit control panel. 2. Unit shall be provided with factory installed and factory wired 115V, 13 amp GFI outlet with outlet dis- connect switch in the unit control panel. 3. Unit shall be provided with phase and brown out protection which shuts down all motors in the unit if the electrical phases are more that 10% out of balance on voltage, the voltage is more that 10% under design voltage, or on phase reversal. 2.05 Supply Blowers A. Unit shall include direct drive, unhoused, backward curved, plenum supply blower B. Blowers and motors shall be dynamically balanced and mounted on rubber isolators. C. Motors shall be premium efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated for 200,000 hours service with external lubrication points. Variable frequency drive(s) shall be factory wired and mounted in the unit. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 237414 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2.06 Cooling Coils A. Evaporator Coil(s) 1. Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of copper tubes with alumi- num fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and galvanized steel end casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled. 2. Coils shall have interlaced circuitry and shall be 6 row high capacity. 3. Coils shall be helium leak tested. 4. Coil shall be furnished with a factory installed thermostatic expansion valve. 2.07 Refrigeration System A. Unit shall be factory charged with R-410A refrigerant. B. Compressors shall be scroll type with thermal overload protection, independently circuited, and carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty. C. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated service compartment which can be accessed without affect- ing unit operation. Lockable hinged compressor access doors shall be fabricated of double wall, high per- formance composite panels with an R-value of 13 to prevent the transmission of noise outside the cabinet. D. Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan with the compressor manufacturer’s recommended rub- ber vibration isolators, to reduce any transmission of noise from the compressor into the building area. E. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow control. F. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high pres- sure refrigerant safety controls, Schrader type service fittings on both the high pressure and low pressure sides, and factory installed liquid line filter driers. G. Digital scroll compressors: Unit shall include a modulating capacity scroll compressor on the first refrigera- tion circuit which shall be capable of modulation from 10-100% of its capacity. 2.08 Condensers A. Air-Cooled Condenser 1. Condenser fans shall be vertical discharge axial flow direct drive fans. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 237414 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2. Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of copper tubes with alumi- num fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and galvanized steel end casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled 3. Coils shall be designed for a minimum of 10 degrees of refrigerant sub-cooling. 4. Coils shall be helium leak tested. 2.09 Gas Heating A. Unit shall include a natural gas furnace with 2 or 4 stages of capacity. B. Aluminized steel heat exchanger furnaces shall carry a 15 year non-prorated warranty. C. Gas furnace shall consist of aluminized steel heat exchangers with multiple concavities, an induced draft blower, and an electronic pressure switch to lockout the gas valve until the combustion chamber is purged and combustion airflow is established. D. Furnace shall include a gas ignition system consisting of an electronic igniter to a pilot system, which will be continuous when the heater is operating, but will shut off the pilot when heating is not required. E. Unit shall have gas supply piping entrances in the unit base for through-the-curb gas piping and in the out- side cabinet wall for across the roof gas piping. 2.10 Filters 1. Unit shall include a 2 inch thick, permanent filter frame with replaceable media, upstream of the cool- ing coil. 2. Unit shall include a clogged filter switch 2.11 Outside Air 1. Unit shall include 0-100% modulating damper consisting of a motor operated outside air damper and return air damper assembly constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, airfoil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 15 CFM of leakage per sq. ft. of damper area when subjected to 2 inches w.g. air pressure differential across the damper. Damper assembly shall be controlled by a (DDC) actuator. Unit shall include outside air opening bird screen, outside air hood with rain lip, and barometric relief dampers. Unit shall be furnished with return air CO override. 2 2.12 Controls A. Factory Installed and Factory Provided Controller PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 237414 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Unit controller shall be capable of controlling all features and options of the unit. Controller shall be factory installed in the unit controls compartment and factory tested. Controller is configurable for standalone control or integrated third party control. 2. A field installed supply air temperature sensor shall be furnished for installation by contractor. 3. Controller shall have an onboard clock and calendar functions that allow for occupancy scheduling. 4. Controller shall include non-volatile memory to retain all programmed values without the use of a bat- tery, in the event of a power failure. 5. Controller shall contain diagnostics to indicate controller power, communications, unit alarms, and sensor failures. 6. Controller capable of the following: a. Average up to 3 space temperature/humidity sensors b. Interlock with up to 4 exhaust fans with incremental adjustable outside air damper positions c. Minimum outside air damper with CO2 override d. Control up to 2 heat reclaim stages Unit to be complete with the following CES Low Voltage Terminal Block Connections: Inputs: (HEAT RECLAIM) 1) Heat 1 Mode Enable (GAS HEAT ENABLE) 2) Heat 2 Mode Enable 3) Cooling Mode Enable 4) Dehumidification Mode Enable 5) System Enable 6) Occupied 7) Outside air damper Outputs: 8) Heating Fail 9) Cooling Fail 10) Airflow/fan Fail 11) Dirty Filter Alarm 12) Heat Reclaim Alarm 12) Heat Reclaim Enable Stage 1 13) Heat Reclaim Enable stage 2 2.14 Curbs A. Curbs shall to be fully gasketed between the curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perime- ter support, cross structure support and air seal for the unit. Curb gasket shall be furnished within the con- trol compartment of the rooftop unit to be mounted on the curb immediately before mounting of the rooftop unit B. Knockdown curb shall be factory furnished for field assembly. PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 237414 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to ARI Guideline B. Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts. B. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain. C. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance. 1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service. D. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb. 3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." 4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Report results in writing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters. END OF SECTION 237414 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 237414 - 7 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electrical installation requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For sleeve seals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, and wireways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inchesand no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inchesand 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2.2 SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.3 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, or wireways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inchesabove finished floor level. G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inchannular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry 1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing. I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inchannular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inchannular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. END OF SECTION 260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Field quality-control test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 4. Southwire Company. B. Copper and Aluminum Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN and XHHW. D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC cable. E. The use of nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM, and Type USE with ground wire cables are not acceptable. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Service Entrance Feeder: Aluminum; stranded or Copper; stranded as indicated on one-line diagram. B. Feeders: Stranded Copper. C. Branch Circuits: Stranded Copper. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. The use of nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM, and Type USE with ground wire cables are not acceptable. The use of metal clad cables is not acceptable for branch circuit home runs to panelboards and B. dedicated branch circuits. C. Service Entrance: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. D. Exterior Feeders: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. E. Exposed, Interior, Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. F. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC. G. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. H. Exposed, Interior, Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. I. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC. J. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. K. Exterior Branch Circuits: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. L. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. M. Class 2 Control Circuits: Power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inchesof slack. 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire- resistance rating of assembly. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 1. Ground rods. 2. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals: 1. Documentation of grounding features at grounding connections for separately derived systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inchin diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor; minimum. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 incheswide and1/16 inchthick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 incheswide and 1/16 inchthick. 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper, sectional type; 5/8-inches in diameter by 120 inches. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper or tinned-copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum. 1. Bury at least 24 inchesbelow grade. C. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements. B. Pad-Mounted Transformers: Ground per utility specifications and requirements. As a minimum install four ground rods and ground ring around the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than6 inchesfrom the foundation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. E. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4- by-2-by-6-inchcopper grounding bus. 2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inchesbelow finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least two ground rods spaced at least thirty (30) feet from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. 2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. 3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. F. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each steel column. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: B. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. C. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Appendix B. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. d. Seasafe, Inc. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items. 3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel. 4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria. C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 3.4 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Custom enclosures and cabinets. C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups with common supports. D. Qualification Data: For testing agency. E. Source quality-control test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 7. Maverick Tube Corporation. 8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Company. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. IMC: ANSI C80.6. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa D. EMT: ANSI C80.3. E. FMC: Zinc-coated steel. F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. G. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Fittings for EMT: Steel set-screw or compression type. H. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. ElecSYS, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 11. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation. B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated. C. LFNC: UL 1660. D. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B. 2.3 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE RACEWAY AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Arnco Corporation. 2. Endot Industries Inc. 3. IPEX Inc. 4. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. B. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible type, approved for plenum, riser installation. 2.4 METAL WIREWAYS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Prime coating, ready for field painting. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Thomas & Betts Corporation. b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. 2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 11. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover. D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2. E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint. H. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4. B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Surface Metal Raceway in finished spaces and EMT in unfinished spaces. 2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: IMC. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC. 6. Raceways for Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: Plenum-type, communications cable raceway. 7. Raceways for Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: Riser-type, communications cable raceway. 8. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, nonmetallic in damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Install raceways for branch circuit homeruns from panelboards to the first wiring device, for all dedicated branch circuits, and for all lighting branch circuits, except maximum length of 6-foot metal clad cable may be used for final connection to lighting fixtures. C. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. D. Keep raceways at least 2 inches away from bottom of roof deck such that roofing fasteners will not puncture conduit. E. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. F. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." G. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. H. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. I. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa J. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Change from RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, to rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor. K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. N. Raceways for Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1.3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2.1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. O. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. P. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. 1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg Ftemperature change. 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change. 3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation. Q. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. R. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Site/Civil specifications for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified in Site/Civil specifications. 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Site/Civil specifications. 4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 5. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit. 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire- resistance rating of assembly. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Identification for raceway and metal-clad cable. 2. Identification for conductors. 3. Underground-line warning tape. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Equipment identification labels. 6. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAY AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. B. Color for Printed Legend: 1. Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable. C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. F. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use. 2.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inchthick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line. 2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with black letters on a white background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. B. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb, minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding. B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 50 A: Identify with orange self-adhesive vinyl label or snap-around label. B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For secondary conductors No. 2 AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, and handholes use color-coding conductor tape and metal tags. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above. C. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use color-coding conductor tape and write-on tags. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number. D. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source and circuit number. E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. F. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway. G. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Controls with external control power connections. 2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. H. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Stenciled legend 4 inches high. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. d. Transformers. e. Disconnect switches. f. Enclosed circuit breakers. g. Motor starters and controllers. h. Push-button stations. i. Contactors. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. G. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied or, for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit, field applied. 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White. e. Ground: Green 3. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. J. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 09 painting Sections. END OF SECTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 1. Indoor occupancy sensors. 2. Lighting contactors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors. 1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hubbell Lighting. 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 3. Pass & Seymour 4. Watt Stopper (The). B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit. 1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit. LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70. 4. Mounting: a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inchknockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. 5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor. 6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure. 7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when selected lighting level is present. C. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a change in pattern of reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage. 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inchesin either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft.when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling. 4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft.when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling. 5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet. 2.2 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. GE Industrial Systems; Total Lighting Control. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. B. Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). 2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation. 3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA type specified for the enclosure. 2.3 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators. 3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by occupancy sensors at each sensor. B. Label contactors with a unique designation. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. 2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays. B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than- normal occupancy hours for this purpose. END OF SECTION 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. D. Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following as required: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. PANELBOARDS262416 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Comply with NEMA PB 1. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation. B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: Two spares for each rating and type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces as required. B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets as indicated. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. c. Enclosures shall be marked with the enclosure-type number as noted in NEC 2008 Table 110.20. PANELBOARDS262416 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components. 4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover. C. Incoming Mains Location: Top or bottom. D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 3. Sub-Feed and Feed-Thru Lugs as indicated. E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type. C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1. For doors more than 36 incheshigh, provide two latches, keyed alike. D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only as indicated. E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: bolt-on circuit breakers. PANELBOARDS262416 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal. 2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only as indicated. D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 2 t response. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I 4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. 5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 7. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time- delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit. PANELBOARDS262416 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa f. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position. g. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position. 2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards. C. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. F. Install filler plates in unused spaces. G. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from recessed panelboards into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. I. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." PANELBOARDS262416 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. C. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. E. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 262416 PANELBOARDS262416 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 262713 - ELECTRICITY METERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes equipment for utility company's electricity metering. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. Describe electrical characteristics, features, and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. Include the following: 1. Electricity-metering equipment. B. Shop Drawings for Electricity-Metering Equipment: 1. Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring specific to this Project. Identify terminals and wiring designations and color codes to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance. Indicate recommended types, wire sizes, and circuiting arrangements for field-installed wiring, and show circuit protection features. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electricity-metering equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, store, and handle metering equipment as specified in NECA 400. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Electrical Service Connections: Coordinate with utility companies and components they furnish as follows: 1. Comply with requirements of utilities providing electrical power and communication services. 2. Coordinate installation and connection of utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed or noted. ELECTRICITY METERING 262713 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2.2 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY UTILITY COMPANY A. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company. B. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company. C. Meter sockets shall be marked with the enclosure-type number as noted NEC 2008 Table 110.20 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1. B. Install equipment for utility company metering. Install raceways and equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide empty conduits for metering leads and extend grounding connections as required by utility company. END OF SECTION 262713 ELECTRICITY METERING 262713 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Wall-box motion sensors. 3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 4. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors. 5. Communications outlets. 6. Cord and plug sets. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wiring devices by one of the following: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. B. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Hubbell; CR 5253IG. b. Leviton; 5362-IG. c. Pass & Seymour; IG6300. 2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 2.4 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. 1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent. 2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.5 SNAP SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 2.6 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Wall-Switch Sensors: 1. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. B. Ceiling Mounted PIR Type: Detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and movement in area of coverage. 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch-minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. 2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft.when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling. 2.7 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations." WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: 1. NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. 2. NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistance, plastic, while-in-use cover. 2.8 FINISHES A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 1. Wiring Devices: Ivory where walls are laminate or painted; Gray in back room and utility area. 2. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inchesin length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. F. Sensor installation WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. G. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 262813 - FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches and enclosed controllers. 2. Spare-fuse cabinets. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated: 1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instantaneous peak let- through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 4. Coordination charts and tables and related data. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves (instantaneous peak let- through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 4. Coordination charts and tables and related data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses. D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. FUSES262813 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 3. Littelfuse, Inc. 2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged. B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features. C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment. D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS A. Cartridge Fuses: 1. Service Entrance: Class RK1, time delay. 2. Feeders: Class RK1, time delay. 3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 4. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 5. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder. END OF SECTION 262813 FUSES262813 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fusible switches. 2. Nonfusible switches. 3. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 4. Enclosures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. B. Field quality-control reports. 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. C. Manufacturer's field service report. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. 2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NFPA 70. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Larger: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 4. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Larger: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings: 1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 2 t response. 4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I F. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). G. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). H. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. 4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor. 5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 2.4 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. C. Install fuses in fusible devices. D. Comply with NECA 1. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing as necessary or required. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges. END OF SECTION 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 6. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power wiring. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years. 2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years. B. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Battery and Charger Data: One for each emergency lighting unit. 4. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 5. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: B. In Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. C. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. E. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. G. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. H. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inchminimum unless different thickness is indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; instant-start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated. 1. Sound Rating: A. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 6. BF: 0.85 or higher. 7. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 2.4 EXIT SIGNS A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. f. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED. 2.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep- discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 6. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is restored after an outage. 7. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED. 2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. T8 instant-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 3100 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 25,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inchsteel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inchsteel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Beam Clamp: Rod Size 3/8 In, Max Load Top Of Beam 500 and Bottom 250 Lb, Material of Construction Electro- Galvanized Malleable Iron, Length 3/4 In, Width 1 1/8 In, Standards Federal Specification WW-H-171 (Type 23), ANSI/MSS-SP-58 (Type 19 & 23) E. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage. F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inchminimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support element. 1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inchesfrom lighting fixture corners. 2. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inchmetal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities. INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. 3. Poles and accessories. 1.3 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4. B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4. C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4. D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4. Insert value from 1. Wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet or less in height is 70 mph < AASHTO LTS-4 for this Project >. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters. 2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories. a. For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer. b. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. 6. Photoelectric relays. 7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. 8. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data. 9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for components involved. 11. Anchor bolts for poles. 12. Manufactured pole foundations. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Shop Drawings: 1. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. C. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4 and that load imposed by luminaire has been included in design. D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660. B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inchesabove grade and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation. C. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on fiberglass and laminated wood poles until right before pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps. D. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the second 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. 5. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: 1 for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 1 for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Ballasts: 1 for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 4. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: B. In Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC- SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors. N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax. 3. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. 2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A. B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time delay.Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from causing false turnoff. 1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with NEMA C136.10. 2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points. 2.4 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. 4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer. 2.5 HID LAMPS A. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000K. 2.6 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4. 1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in Part 1 "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article, with a gust factor of 1.3. 2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless- steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated. C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components. 1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, unless stainless-steel items are indicated. 3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel. D. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2.7 STEEL POLES A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig; 1-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall. B. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole. C. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC- SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 2. Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal corrosion protection. 3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel. 2.8 POLE ACCESSORIES A. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and nuts. Finish same as pole. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. 3.2 POLE INSTALLATION A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole. B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: 1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches. 2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet. 3. Trees: 15 feet. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility Iowa City, Iowa C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended by pole manufacturer. 1. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete grout firmly packed to fill space. 2. Install base covers, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole. E. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable). 3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION A. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding system. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source. 1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls. C. Illumination Tests: 1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s): a. IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas." D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Owner under separate contracts. 4. Owner-furnished products. 5. Specification and drawing conventions. B. Related Section: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: ALDI Food Store No. 67R 1. Project Location: 760 Ruppert Road, Iowa City, Iowa, 52246 B. Owner: Owner: ALDI – Dwight Division – ONE ALDI Drive, Dwight, IL 60420 1. Owner's Representative: Mike Rosch – Director of Real Estate, ALDI Foods – Dwight Division. C. Architect: Weaver Boos Consultants 4085 Meghan Beeler Court South Bend, Indiana 46628 PH: (574) 271. 3447 FAX: (574) 271. 3343 D. Structural Engineer: Paul Fujawa Engineers 17455 Douglas Road South Bend, Indiana 46635-1732 PH: (574) 273. 5014 SUMMARY 011000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa Other Owner Consultants: The Owner has retained the following design professionals who have prepared desig- nated portions of the Contract Documents: E. Civil Engineer: Weaver Boos Consultants 44085 Meghan Beeler Court South Bend, Indiana 046628 PH: (574) 271. 3447 FAX: (574) 271. 3343. F. Retain first paragraph below only if Contractor is selected by negotiation and subcontracts are subsequently bid. 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. The Work consists of the new construction of a one-story structural-steel frame on CMU or poured in place foundations over concrete footings; masonry veneer with metal stud backup, aluminum storefront windows, and membrane roof; new plumbing, HVAC, and electrical work, including a loading area, sidewalks and other site improvements. B. Type of Contract 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 WORK BY OWNER UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS (APPENDIX B) A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner and other contractors so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner under separate contracts. The Appendix B folder is located within the Vendor information folder on APDProjects. The Vendor Information folder can be found on the left side of this project’s website on www.apdprojects.com. B. Concurrent Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. 1. Roofing Work: a. Materials and Installation to be provided by roofer (bid directly to ALDI.): 1) Roof system (membrane) 2) Rigid insulation on roof deck 3) Tapered insulation on roof deck 4) Penetration flashings 5) Wall/ parapet flashings 6) Roof edge metal (gravel stop) 7) Termination of roof systems 8) All roof flashings required for a complete weather-tight roof system SUMMARY 011000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 9) Roof hatch and guard rails 10) Walk pads 11) Roof warranty b. [Materials and installation that could be included in the roofer scope or G.C. contract]: (verify with ALDI Real Estate Director) 1) Architectural sheet metal (fascia, soffits, scuppers, gutters, downspouts, friezeboards, etc…) 2) Metal wall panel systems (not including storefront, signage or specialty products) 3) Other roof systems (shingles, standing seam, etc…) and related flashings where necessary 4) Vapor barrier on roof Deck c. Materials and installations provided by G.C.: (omitted from roofer bid) 1) Wood blocking 2) Roof curbs 3) Structural steel / reinforcing 4) Framing 5) Roof deck 6) Penetrations through roof deck 7) HVAC work 8) Storefront system 9) Glazing 10) Masonry 11) Roof Drains 2. Automatic Entrances 3. Quarry Tile 4. Signage and Graphics 5. Foodservice Equipment 6. Fire Alarm – Contractor to provide conduit and boxes; verify requirements with Owner. 7. Security System – Contractor to provide conduit and boxes; verify requirements with Owner. 1.6 OWNER-FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PRODUCTS (APPENDIX A) A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections. The Appendix A folder is located within the Vendor information folder on APDProjects. The Vendor Information folder can be found on the left side of this project’s website on www.apdprojects.com. SUMMARY 011000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Contractor to install owner furnished products. C. Owner-Furnished Products: 1. Section 064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork: a. Counter Tops b. Window Sills c. Plastic-laminate-clad Panels 2. Section 083800 Traffic Doors a. Impact Doors **Ordered by G.C., Direct Billed to ALDI Divisional Representative** 3. Section 10/11 0600 Miscellaneous Specialties and Equipment a. Tackboards b. Price Card Moldings c. Security Railings **Ordered by G.C., Direct Billed to ALDI Divisional Representative** d. Battery Chargers e. Safe and Safe Base f. Spot Merchandisers g. Cooler/Freezer Racking System 4. Section 102600 Wall and Door Protection a. Wall Guards b. Floor Mounted Bumper Rail **Ordered by G.C., Direct Billed to ALDI Divisional Representative** c. Graphic Screen Wall Bumper Rail **Ordered by G.C., Direct Billed to ALDI Divisional Representative** d. Door Guards e. Aluminum Corner Guards 5. Section 113100 Residential Appliances a. Refrigerator/Freezer 6. Section 118226 Waste Compactors and Destructors a. Bailing Press 7. Section 123200 Manufactured Casework a. Plastic-laminate-faced Cabinets b. Plastic-laminate-faced Lockers SUMMARY 011000 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa c. Check-out Lanes w/ lane closure straps d. Sacking Counter Unit 1.7 NATIONAL ACCOUNT VENDORS 1. Manufactured Casework a. Contractors doing work for Batavia, Denton, Dwight, Faribault, Greenwood, Hinckley, Oak Creek, O'Fallon, Olathe, Springfield, Valparaiso and Webberville divisions shall determine quantity of KPI Concepts, Inc., material and coordinate with Owner’s Representative to order through Burlington, Iowa. Phone: (319) 754-5922. b. Contractors doing work for Center Valley, Frederick, Jefferson, Mt. Juliet, Orlando, Salisbury, Saxonburg, South Windsor and Tully divisions shall determine quantity of material and coordinate Riddley Cabinet Co., Kings Mountain, NC. Phone: with Owner’s Representative to order through (704) 435-8829. 2. Stainless steel products: order from ‘The Tarpening – LaFollette Company, Inc.’; For pricing and ordering, contact either Chad Martin (cmartin@tarp-laff.com) or Kim Martin (kmartin@tarp-laff.com) Tel: 317-780- 1500. 3. National Account for HVAC Equipment - Refer to Mechanical Drawings Sahara Express™ a. Consolidated Energy Solutions Inc. CES Dual-Path Dehumidification RTU Contact: Rick Wilson (P) 888-598-1198 rickwilson@cesinc.ca b. Lennox Industries - 800-367-6285 4. National Account for Light fixtures - Refer to Electrical Drawings a. Security Lighting – Alexandria Pires – 847-302-3617. 5. National Account for Power Wall - Refer to Electrical Drawings a. Custom Designed Controls, LLC. John Stryker and Ed Rios – 706-356-0325. 6. National Account for Bread Alcove Tile (V2.0 and V3.0 Prototypes) and Restroom - Refer to Architectural Drawings a. Dal-Tile – National pricing is available at any Dal-Tile location. Contractor to request ALDI Tile to receive the ALDI National Account pricing. Dal-Tile Distributor to contact Dal-Tile National Accounts @ national.accounts@daltile.com or 214-309-3391 if any questions or problems arise. b. Confirm the following pricing with Dal-Tile when ordering – see specification section 093000 (Tiling) for more specific information. 1) Bread Area tile, CT-2, 12x12: $2.55 each 2) Restroom Tile, CT-3, 12x12: $1.08 each 3) Restroom Tile Base, CB-1 6x12: $8.50 each 1.8 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. SUMMARY 011000 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 SUMMARY 011000 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Section: 1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, which will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. e. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. f. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. g. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. h. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. i. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. j. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers as required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Conditions: Owner will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Owner will consider requests for substitution if received prior to the Notice of Award, unless otherwise acceptable. All Substitutions must be identified prior to submittal of bid. 1. Conditions: Owner will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Owner will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. 1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Owner will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 7 days,after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Owner. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change. 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Owner will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Work Change Directive: Owner may issue a Work Change Directive. Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Work Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Coordination drawings. 4. Requests for Information (RFIs). 5. Project meetings. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information from each other during construction. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, which depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. a. For stores with a Quarry Tile Sales Floor: Allow time for the Owner to have new quarry tile floor finish installed after perimeter walls and before any new interior partitions, wall furring, or other floor mounted items are installed. The contractor shall be responsible to coordinate extensions of any utilities, which penetrate the floor with quarry tile installation; to provide "mud-free" access to the building for the tile layers and their supplies; to see that an adequate water supply is available in the building during the tile installation. Note: Only wheeled equipment having non-marking wheels shall be allowed on quarry tile and Backroom floors. Contractor shall allow for in his schedule that Owner’s quarry tile installer will not be available to install quarry tile between mid-December and second week in January. 2. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings for areas above ceilings where close tolerances are required between building elements and mechanical and electrical work and where installation is not completely shown on Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. 1.5 KEY PERSONNEL A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Coordinate and submit RFIs via APDProjects in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. 2. During Bidding, the contractor will be responsible to post all RFIs to APDProjects. 3. During Construction, the contractor will be responsible to upload all RFIs to APDProjects. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: Utilize the automated RFI tool on APDProjects. D. The Owner will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for response for each RFI. 1. Action on RFIs that does not constitute a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Owner in writing within 5 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require responsive action. 1.3 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Owner's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each resubmittal. C. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A). j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification. D. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. E. Required Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Owner observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Submit the following number of copies: a. Shop drawings, reviewed and annotated by the Contractor - two black-line prints. b. If electronic shop drawings are submitted, one hardcopy is required to be submitted. c. Product data - 1 copies. d. Samples - 2, plus extra samples as required indicating range of color, finish, and texture to be expected. e. Inspection and test reports - 1 copies. f. Warranties - 2 copies. g. Survey data - 4 copies. h. Closeout submittals - 2 copies. F. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than Contractor will be discarded. 1. Transmittal Form: Use facsimile of sample form included in Project Manual. G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. I. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIRED TEST SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information to the Owner's designated representative in addition to requirements specific to each Section. ARCHITECTURAL/STRUCTURAL TESTS OPER. & MAINT. DATA 1. Subgrade Compaction X (including 7 additional at canopy slab) 2. Concrete Tests: (3 per day min.) A. Concrete Tests X B. One slump test per set of X cylinder tests 3. Concrete Slab At Sales Floor A. Floor Flatness X A. Floor Levelness X 4. Asphalt Base Tests (5 locations) X 5. Overhead Doors X 6. Dock Plate Leveler X PLUMBING TESTS OPER. & MAINT. DATA 1. Water Heaters X HVAC TESTS OPER. & MAINT. DATA 1. Air Handling Units, Curbs,Unit Heater X SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2. Air Balance X ELECTRICAL TESTS OPER. & MAINT. DATA 1. Panels/Switchgear/Disconnects X 2. Bells/Buzzers X 2.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: 1. Action Submittals: Submit paper copies of each submittal as indicated above. 2. Informational Submittals: Submit one paper copie of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." 4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 5. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on , reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed dataunless submittal based upon Architect'sdigital data drawing files is otherwise permitted. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. I. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. K. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa L. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." M. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 2.3 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Owner. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 OWNER’S ACTION A. General: Owner will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Each submittal will be reviewed and marked to indicate corrections or modifications required. C. Informational Submittals: Owner will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Owner will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with . requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Owner or Architect C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect or Owner for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. 1.4 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. B. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Fabricator/Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing/manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. E. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Owner. 2. Notify Owner seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Owner's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. 1.6 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality- control services. END OF SECTION 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. "Directed": A command or instruction by Owner. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." B. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." C. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. D. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. E. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. F. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. G. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ICC International Code Council ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC) C. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board REFERENCES 014200 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point Available from Defense Standardization Program Available from General Services Administration Available from National Institute of Building Sciences FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200 REFERENCES 014200 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 1.2 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to,Owner's construction forces, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. All utility use charges are to be paid by GC until the project is turned over to ALDI. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails. B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. , B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architectand construction personnel office activities and to accommodate project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 1. Contractor shall provide temporary heat maintaining +40 degrees within building shell after wall and roof in- sulation are in place. Contractor shall increase temporary heat to +50 degrees during two weeks that Own- er's quarry tile is being installed by others. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for the project. Permanent electric power service may be used when it becomes available, however monthly charges shall be paid for by the contractor until the building is turned over to the TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa owner. Coordinate with ALDI Construction Representative to determine length of time that building systems, including but not limited to Refrigeration and HVAC, need to be running for proper startup and testing. 1. Install electric power service underground, unless otherwise indicated. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Contractor shall provide temporary lighting maintaining a minimum of 40 FC within building shell. During quarry tile installation, 40 FC at 1’ above floor shall be verified using a light meter. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings. 1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust. C. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course pavement before installation of final course according to Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving." D. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. E. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel. F. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. G. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. H. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." I. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply withrequirements of 2003 EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent and requirements specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing." C. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials. F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations, and as directed by Owner. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day. H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete. C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows: 1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building. 2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material. 4. Discard, replace or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 5. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes. 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Section: 1. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Use product specified if Owner does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. B. Product Selection Procedures: PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. 4. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or , substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be consideredunless otherwise indicated. b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Construction Waste Management and Disposal 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. C. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. D. Final Property Survey: Submit 2 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning site work, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. EXECUTION 017300 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architectpromptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Owner. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. EXECUTION 017300 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. C. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field- engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. D. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyorto prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. F. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. G. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL A. Target end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work where possible. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. EXECUTION 017300 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. 1. Any effluent or excess runoff from masonry cleaning must be treated and released in accordance with all federal state and local requirements. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. C. Only wheeled equipment having non-marking wheels shall be allowed on quarry tile and Backroom floors. 3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. EXECUTION 017300 - 4 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 017300 EXECUTION 017300 - 5 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request. 1. Schedule Substantial Completion walk-through with Required Design Professionals. General Contractor shall contact the Building Department to determine any additional design professional affidavits required prior to issuance of C of O and provide at least (1) months notice to Professional of Record to schedule visits prior to anticipated turn over date or issuance of Certificate of Occupancy. 2. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 3. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 4. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 5. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 6. Complete startup testing of systems. 7. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 11. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 1.5 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Pressure wash the following areas: 1) All concrete under canopy including shopping cart storage area, concrete bumpers. 2) All sidewalks adjacent to the building, truck dock well, and stairs. 3) Entire parking lot and parking lot curbs. 4) All perimeter sidewalks on site or adjacent. 5) Parking lot drive entrance. 6) Any brick that was soiled during landscaping. 7) Offsite pavement adjacent to site that was soiled by general contractor. e. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. f. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. g. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. h. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. i. Sweep and vacuum all concrete floors. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. n. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned- out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. END OF SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Emergency operation and maintenance manuals. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit two sets of marked-up record prints. B. Record Product Data: Submit two paper copies of each submittal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. 2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification,where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1 ALDI Retail Facility - Iowa City, Iowa 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 2.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Format: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, 2 copies. B. Emergency Manuals: Types of emergencies, emergency instructions, and emergency procedures. C. Operation Manuals: System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, operating procedures, wiring diagrams, control diagrams and sequence of operation, and piped system diagrams. D. Product Maintenance Manuals: Source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds. E. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2